JP2021016648A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a primary flow path for allowing game balls to enter a variable winning through gate 85 for imparting a primary profit to a player; a secondary flow path for allowing game balls to enter an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84 for imparting a secondary profit to a player; a tertiary flow path for allowing game balls to enter a lower operation port 26 and an out port 28 for imparting a tertiary profit to a player; and rotary distribution means 82 that has an operation state allowing game balls to flow down to one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path, and a non-operation state allowing game balls to flow down to the tertiary flow path. The rotary distribution means 82 allows game balls to flow down to one of the primary flow path and the secondary flow path in an operation state, and a ratio of allowing game balls to flow down to the secondary flow path is larger than a ratio of allowing game balls to flow down to the primary flow path.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 74

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's attention to the game.

The game machine of the present invention includes a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a start ball entry means for executing an internal lottery when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, and a start ball. A game machine provided with a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means. The board has a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter the primary ball entry area that gives the player a primary benefit, and a secondary channel that is smaller than the primary benefit. Granting profit to the player A secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter the secondary ball entry area and a third profit that is smaller than the second profit are given to the player. Operation that allows the game ball to flow down into either the third flow path, the first flow path, or the second flow path, which allows the game ball to enter the third entry area. It has a state and a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down to the third flow path, and is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. In the operating state, the ratio of the game ball flowing down to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path and the game ball flowing down to the secondary flow path is the primary flow. It is characterized in that it is larger than the rate at which the game ball is allowed to flow down the road.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of the pachinko machine according to the reference embodiment of the present invention Front view of the game board Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning / failing table that stores the values of random numbers that win the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process Diagram showing the flowchart of the main process The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control process The figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device Diagram showing the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the hold decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the hold occurrence processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the hold shift processing A diagram showing a notice hold pattern, a normal hold pattern, and a special hold pattern displayed on the display screen of the design display device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a reference embodiment A of the present invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of the hold occurrence processing A diagram showing a notice hold pattern, a normal hold pattern, and a special hold pattern displayed on the display screen of the design display device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of an effect pattern Diagram showing the flow of look-ahead production The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of a frame buffer when it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the 3rd area of the 1st sub side hold area. After it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area, the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first hold shift process is executed. Diagram showing After it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area, the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed. Diagram showing After it is specified that the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area, the first hold shift process is executed, and then the special hold is performed in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. A diagram showing a display screen of a symbol display device and each layer of a frame buffer when it is specified that information is stored. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of a frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the 1st area of the 2nd sub side hold area. The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern which concerns on reference form B of this invention. The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of a frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the 1st area of the 2nd sub side hold area. After it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed. Diagram showing The figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the effect pattern which concerns on reference form C of this invention. After it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, the pattern display when the special hold digestion effect is terminated and the notice hold digestion effect is executed. The figure which shows the display screen of a device and each layer of a frame buffer. Front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment D of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage The figure which shows the operation state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the 1st plate shape part of the 1st plate. Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Diagram showing the game balls distributed to the routes that enter the guideway The figure which shows the operation state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with a rotating door Diagram showing game balls assigned to routes that fall into the game area Front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment E of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage The figure which shows the operation state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the 1st plate shape part of the 1st plate. Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Diagram showing the game balls distributed to the routes that enter the guideway The figure which shows the operation state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with a protruding part Diagram showing game balls assigned to routes that fall into the game area Front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment F of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment G of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the reference embodiment H of the present invention. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Diagram showing game balls assigned to routes that fall into the game area Front view of the game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention Lower right Enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the gaming means Plan view of Kroon enlarged vertically from above The figure which shows the Kroon induction state which rotated the rotating body The figure which shows the start port guidance state which rotated the rotating body Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of a jackpot type The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the prize processing for open prize The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process The figure which shows the flowchart of the special game execution process Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Diagram showing the symbol display device, variable winning device, and open winning device before executing the special game. A diagram showing a symbol display device, a variable winning device, and an open winning device in a state where a special game is being executed. An enlarged front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. The figure which shows the Kroon induction state which moved a moving body The figure which shows the start port guidance state which moved the moving body The figure which shows the flowchart of the special game execution process Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing An enlarged front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. The figure which shows the state which guided the game ball to Kroon by the rotary distribution means The figure which shows the state which guided the game ball to the open start port by a rotary distribution means The figure which shows the flowchart of the special game execution process Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice emission control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the production decision processing Front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Lower right Enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the gaming means Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of a normal process The figure which shows the opening amount of the opening / closing door of the operation winning device

[Reference form]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 1 and a game machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the front (front side). It has 12 and.

The game machine main body 12 is arranged in front of an inner frame (not shown) supported by an outer frame 11 so that one of the left and right side portions can be rotated as a support side, and both left and right sides. The front door frame 121 supported by the inner frame so that one of the portions can be rotated forward with one of the portions as the support side, and the rear door frame 121 are arranged behind the inner frame, and one of the left and right side portions is the support side. It is equipped with a back pack unit (not shown) supported by an inner frame so that it can rotate to.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also has a function of locking the front door frame 121 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 13 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The front door frame 121 has a substantially elliptical window portion 122 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 123 fitted in the window portion 122. In this reference embodiment, the window panel 123 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin or the like.
Further, the front door frame 121 includes a display lamp unit 124 provided above the window unit 122 as a part of light emitting means composed of various lamp units and the like provided around the window unit 122, and a display lamp unit. A speaker unit 125 provided on both the left and right sides of the 124 and outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 14 and a lower bulging portion 15 provided below the window portion 122 are provided. There is.

The upper bulging portion 14 and the lower bulging portion 15 are provided side by side in the upper and lower portions, and both are provided so as to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 14 has an upper plate 141 provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 141 temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and while arranging them in a row, moves to the game ball launch mechanism 49 (see FIG. 4) side. It has a function to guide.
The lower bulging portion 15 also has a lower plate 151 provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 151 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 141.

Further, the front door frame 121 includes a firing handle 16 as a launching means provided on the right side of the lower plate 151. The launch handle 16 launches a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 49 provided below the inner frame toward the game area provided above the inner frame by being operated by the player of the pachinko machine 1. To do. The firing handle 16 changes the firing intensity of the gaming ball to be launched toward the gaming area, that is, the firing momentum, by changing the rotation operation amount thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 2 has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on the inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 2 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. In this game area, substantially the entire area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 122.
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 constitute a guide rail 23 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 23 is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 49 by the player rotating the launch handle 16. Guide the played game ball to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 16 by the player increases. It shifts to the side of the side. In this reference embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

The game board 2 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 2 includes a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 26, and a variable winning device 27 provided in each opening. And has an out port 28. Further, the game board 2 includes a through gate 31 provided on each of the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 32 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 provided in the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 2 has a large number of nails NL planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 27 is provided with detection sensors 301 to 304 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 301 to 304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is provided with the detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is provided with the detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is provided with the detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 is the detection sensor 304. It has. The pachinko machine 1 executes a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 304. The detection sensors 301 to 304 may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 executes 10 prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 24. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 25 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 26. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 27. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 25 and 26 may be different.

The out port 28 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area through the out openings 28. Further, the out port 28 includes a detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 305 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out port 28, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning ports.

Each through gate 31 includes a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 306 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 31, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 28, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 31 means that after passing through a gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. The entry into the through gate 31 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 2. Each of the operating ports 25 and 26 is opened upward together so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operating port 25 is arranged above and the lower operating port 26 is arranged below. They are installed side by side in the vertical direction. The lower operating port 26 has an electric accessory 261 as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 261 is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. The electric accessory 261 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory driving unit 262. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is closed by bringing the upper ends of the electric accessory 261 close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 261 in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 261 and the upper operating port 25 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 261 and the upper operating port 25 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 26 when the electric accessory 261 is set to the closed state, and may win the lower operating port 26 when the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state. it can.

In addition, the electric accessory 261 is in a state where it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 26 (a state in which a game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and a lower state instead of the closed state and the open state described above. The operating port 26 may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 26 may be configured such that such switching is not performed by setting the electric accessory 261 but by displacement of the lower operating port 26. In the case of such a configuration, the lower operating port 26 may be configured. 26 does not have to include the electric accessory 261.

The variable winning device 27 drives a large winning opening 271 that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 272 for opening / closing the large winning opening 271, and an opening / closing door 272. It includes a variable winning drive unit 273.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 27 while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

Here, the game board 2 includes a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. The cover 29 is provided around a transparent (or translucent) transparent panel 291 so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and the transparent panel 291 and is opaquely formed. It has a panel 292.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.

The grand prize opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 271 includes a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 271. The opening / closing door 272 is in a closed state in which the opening of the grand prize opening 271 is closed by advancing toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 2 to be a game board. By burying it in 2, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 271 is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 273 sets the open / close door 272 to either the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door 272.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 272 is usually set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 272 is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state so that a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 271. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.

The main display device 32 includes a main display unit 34 and a display unit 35 for accessories, and has a plurality of display devices such as a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner and a dot display unit. It is arranged and configured.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2 so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 32 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1 via the window panel 123. Further, the distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than that of one game ball. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 has a first result display unit 341 for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 25, and the inside performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 26. A second result display unit 342 for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 4). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode when the open / close execution mode is set (or the open / close execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 341 executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 25, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 25. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the open / close execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes the variation display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 26, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 26. Display the result of. When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

The accessory display unit 35 executes the variable display of the pattern triggered by the winning of each through gate 31, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of each through gate 31. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 35 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the electric service open state. In this electric service open state, the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

In this reference embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the accessory display unit 35 are composed of a segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, the CRT, and the like. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 34 and the accessory display unit 35, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 33 includes a symbol display device 36 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 33 includes a center frame 37 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 36. The upper portion of the center frame 37 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 36 starts the variable display of the symbol based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. That is, when the symbol display device 36 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 341 of the main display unit 34 and the variation display on the second result display unit 342 of the main display unit 34, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 36 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 37 includes a first holding lamp portion 371 provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 36, a second holding lamp portion 372 provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 36, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp portion 373 provided in the upper region of the device 36.

The first holding lamp unit 371 is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The first holding lamp unit 371 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 341 and the symbol display device 36.
The second holding lamp unit 372 is a portion that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the lower operating port 26, and lights up according to the number of holdings. The second holding lamp unit 372 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third hold lamp unit 373 is a portion that displays the number of hold of the game balls that have won a prize in each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of hold. The third holding lamp unit 373 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 35.
In addition, each holding lamp unit 371-273 may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 36 described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is divided into three rows of display areas, and the left symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the right symbol are in each display area in this order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" is next to "8". It is composed of. In FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is indicated by a alternate long and short dash line.

The symbol display device 36 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment) based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for the game round is executed on the display screen G. The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. It ends in the state.
That is, the game times means from the start of the variable display on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the winning of each of the operating ports 25 and 26.

The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 36 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol string, the scroll direction of each symbol string, the number of symbols of each symbol string, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol of each symbol string may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machines>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a voice emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a payout control device 46 and a power supply / launch control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 described above to pay out the game ball. The power supply / launch control device 47 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 41 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 constituting the MPU 42. Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 43 and the RAM 44.
In this reference embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 42, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 431, a distribution table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 43, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 44 has various areas such as various counter areas 441, a holding ball storage area 442, and an electric service holding area 443. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 42 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main control device 4 and the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45, the payout control device 46, and the voice emission control device 5. Further, the output port of the MPU 42 includes an electric accessory drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26, a variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening / closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, and a main display. It is connected to the unit 34 and the accessory display unit 35.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 262 to open and close the electric accessory drive 261. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to open / close the large winning opening 271. Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the main display unit 34 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 25 and 26. Further, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 35 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 31.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply / launch control device 47 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 47. .. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306 correspond to the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, various winning openings of the variable winning device 27, the out opening 28, and each through gate 31 on a one-to-one basis. It is provided. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, the MPU 42 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for various winning openings, out openings 28, and each through gate 31. The MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player at the time of a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 4. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 47 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 47 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 41, the payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 47 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 47 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 49. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 141 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 23 toward the guide rail 23. The power supply / launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing an internal lottery in the MPU of the main control device>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for generating jackpots, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and draws whether or not to generate reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 42 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36. Further, the MPU 42 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26 is in the electric service open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 441 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM44 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 (see FIG. 4) provided as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 443 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 31. Will be done.

The holding ball storage area 442 includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The holding area Ra for the first result display unit provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 42 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1 → the second area Ra2 → the third area Ra3 → the fourth area Ra4 when the upper operating port 25 is won a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the upper operating port 25 are held. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
The number of holdings related to the upper operating port 25 is not limited to four, and may be any other, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be a single number. You may.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 uses the set of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 42 holds the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the lower operating port 26 is awarded a prize a plurality of times in succession. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit includes four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the lower operating port 26 are held. Further, the hold area Rb for the second result display unit includes a storage area for writing the number of holds stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of holdings related to the lower operating port 26 is not limited to 4, but may be any other, such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, and may be a single number. You may.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of each result display unit 341, 342, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

The electric service holding area 443 includes four storage areas like the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. Therefore, the winning of the game ball to each through gate 31 is reserved up to four.
The number of reserved pieces related to each through gate 31 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, may be two, three, or five or more, and may be a single number. You may.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time the update is performed, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric service holding area 443 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 31. To.
Then, the MPU 42 draws a lottery (electric combination) as to whether or not the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26 is set to the electric service open state based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 443. Execute the open lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency of winning the game ball into the lower operating port 26 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high frequency support mode, as compared with the low frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won, the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state more often, and the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 261 to the closed state is shorter than the one-time opening time during each opening in the one-time electric service open state. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the minimum waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 35) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win the lower operating port 26 as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player strikes the launch handle 16 to the left with a medium amount of rotation, and the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed at the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side of the side to the center, the probability of winning the upper operating port 25 can be higher than that of the lower operating port 26. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set on the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the lower operating port 26 rather than the upper operating port 25.
Then, when a prize is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 25, and is unlikely to cause the game ball to enter the lower operating port 26 (the first left-handed route). 1) and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 26 and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 25. There is.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected securing times may be set. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state to the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high as compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 26. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 44 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery for generating a big hit (win / fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a winning / failing table in which the values of random numbers that win the jackpot occurrence are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is determined in the hit / miss table storage area 431 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as the hit / miss information group storage means, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (win / fail information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has two winning / losing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 6 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information) shown in FIG. 6 (b). Group) and.
The MPU 42 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

These winning / failing tables have the results (winning / failing results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6A, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is two. Is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for generating a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6B, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is 21. Is. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot winning stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode may have a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / losing table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the random number values that are stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and become the "big hit winning".

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these out-of-order results are common in that they do not trigger a transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 26. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 44 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
As shown in FIG. 7, the random number values related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are distributed in the distribution table storage area 432 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7 (b). ing.
The MPU 42 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 25. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7A, the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified low probability result (high probability result corresponding to low probability)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are "unspecified". "Round high accuracy result" is assigned, "15-19" is assigned to "explicit small round high accuracy result", and "20 to 29" is assigned to "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 26. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 7B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, a “low probability result” and a “most advantageous result”, as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are "most advantageous results". It is distributed to.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 27 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
The "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.
The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 27 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is set in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 44 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 25, and the game ball wins in the lower operating port 26. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 44 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 42 is the value of the reach table and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit" in the winning / losing lottery. By comparing with and, a lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 433 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43.

Here, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery is assigned to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 36 stops the same odd number or the same even number. The combination of symbols having the number of is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the symbol display device 36 sets the stop result to a combination of symbols having the same even number. Is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Furthermore, when the winning / fail lottery is a "big hit" and the lottery is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result", or "big hit winning" in the winning / failing lottery. If the result is a "special loss result", the symbol display device 36 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal loss result" in the winning / losing lottery. A combination of special symbols (for example, "3.4.1") having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped and displayed on the effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, “unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into the "probable result" or the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

In the reach display mode, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, some of the symbol rows (for example, the symbol rows Z1 and the symbol rows Z3) are placed on the effective line L. By displaying the stop, the same combination of symbols is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol sequence (for example, symbol sequence Z2) is displayed in a variable manner in that state.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 becomes a "big hit winner" in the winning / losing lottery after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 36 by generating the reach display and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the player expect that the result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery.

The reach display mode is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 36. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / losing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 36 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of expected effects, the reach display and the notice display described above.

The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect.
The lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 4, whereas the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 5. ..

As for the mode of the notice display, among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variablely displayed, and a part of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where the symbol sequence Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L and a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, symbol sequences Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character is displayed. Etc. are displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 42 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 34 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 36 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. The display duration will be described in detail later.

<About various processes executed by the main controller>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order.
The MPU 42 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306. In this reading process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301 to 304 corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 42 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this setting is made. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 46. For example, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the variable winning device 27 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 42 is a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 46.
The payout control device 46 performs payout control for causing the payout device 48 to execute the payout of the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 44. To do. If the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 44. If the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric service holding area 443. Further, the MPU 42 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 373, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 5.
The voice emission control device 5 turns on the third hold lamp unit 373 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 31 is 4, and the third reserved lamp unit 373 lights up by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the actuation port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the detection sensor 302 corresponding to the upper operating port 25 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating opening 25 (starting winning). Is determined. When the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 25, in step S202, the MPU 42 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and holds the holding. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S205.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operating port 25, in step S203, the detection sensor 303 corresponding to the lower operating port 26 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not the above is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating port 26.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the lower operating port 26, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 26, the MPU 42 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. The reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 42 has the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 less than the upper limit value (4 in this reference embodiment) in step S205. Determine if it exists.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operating port. Further, when the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 42 updates by adding 1 to the value of the start hold storage number N in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 42 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 42 has the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set to "3" in step S202, the MPU 42 has a storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 42 has the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of each value of is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. To do. For example, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set to "3" in step S204, the MPU 42 has a storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S208, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 42 recognizes that the hold information is stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. 1 A hold generation command is set, and the set first hold generation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operating port.
This first hold generation command causes the voice emission control device 5 to recognize that the hold information is stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25. Contains information about. In addition, the first hold generation command includes information related to the current support mode.
The voice emission control device 5 turns on the first hold lamp unit 371 and executes a predetermined process based on the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls winning in the upper operating port 25 is 4, and the first reserved lamp unit 371 lights up by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

Further, in step S208, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 42 recognizes that the hold information is stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. The second hold generation command is set, and the set second hold generation command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the operating port.
This second hold generation command causes the voice emission control device 5 to recognize that the hold information is stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26. Contains information about. In addition, the second hold generation command includes information related to the current support mode.
The voice emission control device 5 turns on the second hold lamp unit 372 and executes a predetermined process based on the second hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls winning in the lower operating port 26 is 4, and the second reserved lamp unit 372 lights up by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 42 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes a timer interrupt process, a winning process for the operating port, or an external output process for transmitting a command set in the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 42 issues the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and the command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the setting is made, a command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 5.

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the variable type counter CS by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 44. .. If the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the value of the variation type counter CS is returned to 0 to clear the value.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. In the game time control process, the MPU 42 executes a winning / failing lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 36, and finally stops and displays the pattern on the main display unit 34. Execute the determination of information related to.
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes the demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period for the start of the demo (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game after the end of the game. However, if it is determined that the start waiting period has expired, a demo command for starting the demo display is set. The MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 42.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 42 starts a new game round while counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S306, the MPU 42 executes the electric service support process for executing the drive control of the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operating port 26. In this electric service support process, the MPU 42 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 261 is executed. Further, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes the game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 causes the power supply / launch control device 47 to execute launch control for launching the game ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 47 causes the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 in a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this reference embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 16. Further, the power supply / launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball when the predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 44 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power failure monitoring board 45 outputs this power failure signal when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed. The power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 for the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 42 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to the RAM 44. After that, the MPU 42 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S308, whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process is reached in step S309, that is, the current normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this reference embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not been reached, that is, when the remaining time occurs, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S310, and step S311 In, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 42 executes step S301 again to perform the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 42 executes steps S401 to S412, as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 42 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 42 waits for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 5 or the like) to be in an operable state for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on. ) Elapses.

In step S402, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 42 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S403.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission / prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission / prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 42 permits access to the RAM 44.
In step S404, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / emission control device 47 is turned on.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the MPU 42 determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44. To do.

Then, when the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, the MPU 42 calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 42 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 42 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of the normal processing, and if they match, the RAM determination value is compared. , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 42 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 44 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44 in the power failure processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 42 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processes after step S409 are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 42 clears the work area of the RAM 44 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 44 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the amusement park can initialize the data stored in the RAM 44 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM erasing switch at the start of business of the amusement park. Further, the pachinko machine 1 initializes the data stored in the RAM 44 when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 45 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 42 transmits an initial command to the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 5 or the like) in step S411, and in step S412, the timer interrupt Allows the occurrence of processing and shifts to the above-mentioned normal processing.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the control board on the sub side recognizes that communication with the main control board 41 is normally performed, and executes its own initialization. To do.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 42 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 ends the game times control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 25 and 26 is detected.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 34 is in the variable display, that is, the game is in progress. Judge whether or not.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is not in the variable display, the MPU 42 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is in the variable display, the MPU 42 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 42 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 holds the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Ra in step S504. The data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for the digestion of the game times is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 42 causes the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the operating port is "0" or less. To do. When the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit of steps S602 to S606, and in step S601. When it is determined that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit, which sets the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit for digestion of the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for a second result display unit that sets the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for digestion of game times.
Then, when the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the second result display unit does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the data setting process for. In other words, when the MPU 42 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower action port 26, the MPU 42 moves to the upper action port 25. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially played. Set for multiple digestions.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 42 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra4. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 44. The second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 341 and the second result display unit 342 is started the variable display when the game is digested. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 42 has cleared the second result display unit flag, the first result display unit 341 is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the pending information has been executed. After that, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. The MPU 42 transmits the first shift command set in step S606 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process. This first shift command emits a voice indicating that the hold information has been shifted for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25. It contains information for the control device 5 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 5 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 371 based on the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42, and also executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the voice emission control device 5 reduces the number of lights of the first holding lamp unit 371 as the number of holding balls winning the upper operating port 25 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 42 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 44. In this step S610, since the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag, the second result display unit 342 displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26 when the game round is digested. Indicates to start.

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift time command for recognizing that the shift of the pending information has been executed. After that, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. The MPU 42 transmits the second shift command set in step S611 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process. This second shift command emits a voice indicating that the hold information is shifted for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26. It contains information for the control device 5 to recognize.
The voice emission control device 5 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 372 and executes a predetermined process based on the second shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the voice emission control device 5 reduces the number of lights of the second holding lamp unit 372 as the number of holdings of the game balls winning in the lower operating port 26 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 42 sets the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 6A) from the winning / losing table storage area 431 of the ROM 43 in step S702. When it is read and it is determined in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 6B) is stored from the winning / failing table storage area 431 of the ROM 43. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. In this pass / fail determination process, the MPU 42 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the pass / fail table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby resulting in a win / fail lottery result (win / fail result). To judge. As described above, the winning / failing result is one of "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result", and even if the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. The same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is “big hit winning”. When the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S706, and when it determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning". , Step S712 and subsequent processes are executed.

First, in step S705, a process (processes after step S706) when the winning / failing result is determined to be "big hit winning" by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 starts variable display on the first result display unit 341 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7A) is read from the distribution table storage area 432 of the ROM 43.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, the second result display unit 342 based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26 In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 7B) is read from the distribution table storage area 432 of the ROM 43, since it indicates that the variable display is to be started.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 42 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 42 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes the stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342 of the main display unit 34. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 has a pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 43. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag in the RAM 44 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 42 identifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is an "unspecified low round high probability result". In that case, the implicit small round high probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and the "most advantageous result" is set. If it is specified, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, in step S705, a process when the MPU 42 determines that the winning / failing result is not “big hit winning” (processing after step S712) will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result determined in step S704 is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result", it executes the processes after step S713, and determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". Is the process from step S715 onward.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes the stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 42 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342 of the main display unit 34, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in the ROM 43 in advance. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 42 sets the special off flag in the RAM 44.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is the "special miss result" by referring to the special miss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 42 normally executes the stop result setting process for the outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 42 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342 of the main display unit 34, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 43. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 42 executes the display duration (display duration) setting process in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44.

Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the reach display occurs on the symbol display device 36. Specifically, in the MPU 42, when the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result", and the pass / fail result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, if the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display will occur. As described above, the MPU 42 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold ball storage area 442. Execute a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 42 determines that the reach display occurs, the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 42 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 for the variable type counter. The display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration is set in the display duration counter provided in various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display duration when the hold information related to the upper operating port 25 is digested is set to be shorter as the number of holdings related to the upper operating port 25 increases. The display duration when digesting the hold information related to the lower operating port 26 is set so as to become shorter as the number of holdings related to the lower operating port 26 increases. In addition, the display duration table for non-reach is set so that when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display duration is shorter than when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holds is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table.

The display duration table for non-reach generation may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such that the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It may be configured so as not to fluctuate. In addition, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the winning / failing result and the sorting result.

In step S717, the MPU 42 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the voice emission control device 5.
The voice emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

The variable command contains information related to the display duration. In addition, the variable command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-reach display duration table are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is displayed by the voice emission control device 5 which is the control device on the sub side based on the information related to the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command contains information related to the result of success or failure. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result" as information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command has information related to the distribution result, such as "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". Contains information.
In the following description, the winning / failing result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command contains information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, and causes the main display unit 34 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 42 ends the fluctuation start processing.
Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 44, the first one is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 341 starts the variable display, the first result display unit 341 is made to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 is second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26 at the time of digesting the game times. Since it indicates that the result display unit 342 starts the variable display, the second result display unit 342 is made to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game time control process, the game time progress process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the main display unit 34 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 34 is in the variable display, the MPU 42 is for advancing the game times in steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 44 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed, the MPU 42 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 42 updates the display of the main display unit 34 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, the MPU 42 executes the variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 42 stores information (main) stored in the RAM 44 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 34 starts the variation display. Information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 34) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the main display unit 34 so that the pattern corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 34 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 34 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to make the pachinko machine 1 perform the same behavior as when the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done
Further, the main display unit 34 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 is a symbol string to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 instead of the main display unit 34. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 42 sets the variable end command. The MPU 42 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game times control process.
The voice emission control device 5 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the voice emission control device 5 may be configured to independently end the production of the game times without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S811.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 42 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 34 is completed. When it is determined in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 34 has not been completed, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 is completed, whether or not the hit / fail result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 44, and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normal deviation result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 42 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 42 opens / closes the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S806. Is a small round high probability result (“unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 42 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result, that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result", the step. In S808, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 42 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and the opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 271. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 271 corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the large winning opening 271 once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening / closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 as a waiting time (standby period) for opening in step S809. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of the game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S801, a process when the MPU 42 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S811) will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a large winning opening opening / closing process.
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the large winning opening 271 is open.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 271 is not open, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S902.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the large winning opening 271 is open, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S906.

First, in step S901, a process when the MPU 42 determines that the large winning opening 271 is not open (processes after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the MPU 42 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the timer counter T is set in step S903. It is determined whether or not the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the process of opening the large winning opening in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In the large winning opening opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", in step S1002, "8" is set in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44, and the step In S1003, "85" is set in the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning / failing result is not the "special deviation result", the MPU 42 sets "8" in the winning counter PC in step S1004, and the distribution result in step S1005. Is a small round high probability result (“unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a low-round high-accuracy result, the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the open execution process of the large winning opening 271 in step S1007. In this open execution process, the MPU 42 sets the open / close door 272 to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273. After that, the MPU 42 finishes the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271. Here, in the present reference form, the MPU 42 has the same value when it is determined in step S1001 that the hit / fail result is the "special deviation result" and when it is determined that the result is not the "special deviation result" (in this reference embodiment). Although "8") is set in the winning counter PC, different values may be set in the winning counter PC.

Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration from setting the opening / closing door 272 to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 42 has a long-term mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode (short-term mode). Aspect) and is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 causes the gaming ball launching mechanism 49 to launch the gaming ball by exciting the solenoid of the gaming ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 to eight by setting "8" in the winning counter PC.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 and the firing cycle of the game balls, so that the upper limit of eight game balls It is easy to get a prize in the large winning opening 271.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 271. Depending on the timing, it is possible to have about one game ball win in the large winning opening 271.

Returning to the description of the large winning opening opening / closing process, the process after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 42 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the large winning opening opening process in step S904. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 42 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S901, the process when the MPU 42 determines that the large winning opening 271 is open (processes after step S906) will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1003 or step S1006 of the large winning opening opening process.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S918.

First, in step S906, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 42 to be not "0" or less (processing after step S907) will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 271. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 271 is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the large winning opening 271.

When it is determined in step S907 that no prize has been awarded to the large prize opening 271, the MPU 42 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 271, the MPU 42 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 sets the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets the closure command. The MPU 42 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening / closing door 272 is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S923, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the hit / fail result is not the "special miss result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S913.
In step S913, the MPU 42 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 42 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the opening standby time from setting the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state to setting the opening / closing door 272 to the open state again. Is stipulated. In this reference embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets the ending command. The MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 42 finishes the large winning opening opening / closing process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S906, processing when the value of the timer counter T is determined by the MPU 42 to be “0” or less (processing after step S918) will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets the close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning", the processes after step S921 are executed.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S923.

First, in step S920, a process (processes after step S921) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the result of success or failure is not a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the above-described processing after S916.

Next, in step S912 or step S920, a process (processes after step S923) when the MPU 42 determines that the pass / fail result is a “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S915 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less, the MPU 42 executes the above-mentioned processes after S916.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S811, the MPU 42 determines in step S812 whether the opening / closing counter SOC value is “0” or less and the round counter RC value is “0” or less. judge.

When it is determined in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S813. It is determined whether or not it is "0" or less.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 42 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S814, and then clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S1102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S1105.

First, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 42 determines that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1102) will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 42 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 42 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 44.
Here, the high-frequency support mode continues until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In step S1104, the MPU 42 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 44 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the fluctuation start processing described above, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44. There is.

Next, in step S1101, the process when the MPU 42 determines that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high probability result” (processes after step S1105) will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the distribution result is an “unspecified small round high probability result”.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is an "unspecified small round high probability result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S1106.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the “unspecified small round high probability result”, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S1108.

First, in step S1105, a process (processes after step S1106) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 42 to be an “unspecified small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44 in step S1107. The MPU 42 maintains the high probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery. After that, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Next, in step S1105, a process (processes after step S1108) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the distribution result is not the “unspecified small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result"), the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S1109.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 maintains the high frequency support flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 42 sets “100” to the value of the game counters provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.
In step S1112, the MPU 42 sets the number limit flag in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 44. After that, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game count counter, are played. Continue until the times are digested. The MPU 42 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been completed. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, After the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the sorting result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result". In the game state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game state shifts to the high probability mode and also to the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is in the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current game state). After the end of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning or losing lottery. Move to frequency support mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the voice emission control device 5 includes a voice emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the voice emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, a speaker unit 125, and a display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 4.
Further, the MPU 52 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 6. The voice emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the contents of the sub-side reserved information storage area.
As shown in FIG. 20, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 includes a first sub-side hold area SRa, a second sub-side hold area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side holding area SRa provided as the first sub-side acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4. Each area SRa1 to SRa4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing the normal hold information for generating the normal hold and the notice hold information for causing the notice hold. The normal hold information for generating the normal hold and the notice hold information for generating the notice hold will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or the advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRa1 to SRa4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the first hold occurrence command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 sends the sub-side hold information in the order of the first area SRa1 → the second area SRa2 → the third area SRa3 → the fourth area SRa4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first sub-side hold area SRa includes four storage areas, up to four sub-side hold information based on the first hold occurrence command is held. Further, the first sub-side holding area SRa includes a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side holding area SRb provided as the second sub-side acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4. Each area SRb1 to SRb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing the normal hold information for generating the normal hold and the notice hold information for causing the notice hold. The normal hold information for generating the normal hold and the notice hold information for generating the notice hold will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or the advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the second hold occurrence command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the second hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 sends the sub-side hold information in the order of the first area SRb1 → the second area SRb2 → the third area SRb3 → the fourth area SRb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second sub-side hold area SRb includes four storage areas, up to four sub-side hold information based on the second hold occurrence command is held. Further, the second sub-side holding area SRb includes a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is for moving the sub-side hold information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb when the variable display of the symbol display device 36 is started. The area.

<Electrical configuration of display control device>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video. It is equipped with a RAM 67. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 63 and the work RAM 64. The MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 5, and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to execute the control of the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes control of the VDP65 by generating a command for the VDP65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 65 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 36. Since the VDP65 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 36. The character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 36, and the display content of the symbol display device 36 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 67.

The video RAM 67 includes a decompression buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69.
As described above, the VDP 65 reads the image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary for displaying the image at the update timing of 1 in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is updated at the predetermined update timing. Say that.

Here, the frame buffer 69 includes a plurality of frame areas 691,692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 includes a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692.

Each frame area 691,692 is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each frame area 691,692 includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, each unit area adopts a full-color system, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each color of RGB, and has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes as a whole.

In the situation where drawing to the symbol display device 36 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area (for example, the first frame area 691), the VDP 65 has another frame area (for example, the second frame area 692). ), The drawing data to be used next is created. That is, the frame buffer 69 adopts the double buffer method.

Further, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and transmits the image signal to the symbol display device 36. Output. More specifically, the VDP 65 causes the drawing data to be transferred to the frame areas 691,692 to be output. The VDP 65 adjusts the resolution with a scaler (not shown) and converts it into gradation data so that the drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the symbol display device 36. Then, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the symbol display device 36.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2006, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 52 executes the command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 52 receives a command from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 stores the command in the RAM 54. Specifically, the RAM 54 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands transmitted from the MPU 42, and the MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order transmitted from the MPU 42. The MPU 52 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 52 executes the hold determination process based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42. In the hold determination process, the MPU 52 determines the generation of the hold pattern, the shift of the hold pattern, and the like. This hold decision process will be described in detail later.
In step S2003, the MPU 52 executes the effect determination process based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42. In the effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. This effect determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S2004, the MPU 52 executes the effect execution process based on the contents of the hold decision process in step S2002 and the effect determination process in step S2003. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2005, the MPU 52 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 42. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of various lamp units 124 and voice control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2006, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the hold determination process in step S2002 and the effect determination process in step S2003 to the display control device 6 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 to the display control device 6, and displays various commands to the display control device 6. When it is determined that the timing of transmission to is reached, the command is transmitted to the display control device 6. After that, the MPU 52 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<About the hold decision process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold decision process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes a hold determination process in order to generate a hold pattern, shift the hold picture, and the like. In this hold decision process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2101 to S2104 as shown in FIG. 23.

In step S2101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the hold generation command (first hold generation command or second hold generation command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that the hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that the hold generation command has been received, the MPU 52 executes the hold generation process in step S2102. In this hold generation process, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the content of the hold generation command. This hold generation process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S2102, or when it is determined in step S2101 that the hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2103 and subsequent steps.
In step S2103, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the hold shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If it is determined in step S2103 that the hold shift command has not been received, the MPU 52 ends the hold determination process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2103 that the MPU 52 has received the hold shift command, the MPU 52 executes the hold shift process in step S2104. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the content of the hold shift command. This hold shift process will be described in detail later. After that, the MPU 52 ends the hold generation process.

<Holding process>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in FIG. 24. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the content of the hold occurrence command.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that the first hold generation command has been received, in step S2202, the MPU 52 grasps the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and determines the number of holds. The first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in a predetermined storage area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2201 that the MPU 52 has not received the first hold generation command (when it is determined that the second hold generation command has been received), the MPU 52 is in step S2203. The number of holds stored in the 2 sub-side hold area SRb is grasped, and the hold number is set as the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in a predetermined storage area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

After executing the process of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates by adding 1 to the value of the sub-side start hold storage number SN (SRaN or SRbN) in step S2204.

In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for holding the notice. In this notice hold lottery process, the MPU 52 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice hold.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The advance notice hold generation counter is provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the advance notice hold uses a notice display for changing the type of the hold pattern or the like in order to notify the player of the expected degree of the hold, and the production of the game times based on the hold that is digested before the hold. By doing so, it is a hold that executes a notice display or the like that generates a look-ahead effect that notifies the player of the expected degree of the hold.

The notice hold occurrence counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The advance notice hold occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the advance notice hold occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (lottery for generating notice hold) as to whether or not to generate the notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the buffer for the notice hold occurrence counter. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the advance notice hold occurrence counter stored in the advance notice hold occurrence counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice hold occurrence counter to generate the advance notice hold. Execute the lottery. The notice hold generation table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the lottery for generating advance notice hold has been won (whether or not to generate advance notice hold) in step S2205.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that the advance notice hold is generated, the MPU 52 executes the advance notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating the notice hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the advance notice hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in step S2202, the MPU 52 is updated in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side hold area SRa, that is, in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN. For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set to "3" in step S2202, the MPU 52 corresponds to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN "4" updated in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is the storage area to be stored.

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side hold area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN. For example, when the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN is set to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 corresponds to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN "4" updated in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is the storage area to be stored.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that the advance notice hold is not generated, the MPU 52 executes the normal hold generation process in step S2208. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a normal hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the normal hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in step S2202, the MPU 52 is updated in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side hold area SRa, that is, in step S2204. Normal hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN. For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set to "3" in step S2202, the MPU 52 corresponds to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN "4" updated in step S2204. Normally, hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area to be stored.

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side hold area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The normal hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN. For example, when the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN is set to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 corresponds to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN "4" updated in step S2204. Normally, hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area to be stored.

After executing the advance notice hold generation process in step S2207 or the normal hold generation process in step S2208, the MPU 52 sets the hold display generation command in step S2209. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display occurrence command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the occurrence of the advance notice hold or the normal hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold pattern or the normal hold pattern on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the notice hold or the normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold shift process.
As described above, the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the hold shift process in step S2104 of the hold decision process. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold area based on the content of the hold shift command.

In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received the first shift command, it executes the data setting process of the first sub-side holding area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304, and in step S2301, the first When it is determined that the shift time command has not been received (when it is determined that the second shift time command has been received), the data setting process of the second sub-side hold area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 is executed. ..

First, the data setting process of the first sub-side holding area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304 will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN of the first sub-side hold area SRa.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process for shifting the sub-side hold information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the sub-side hold information stored in each area SRa1 to SRa4 to the first area SRa1 side. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information of the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, shifts the sub-side hold information of the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and shifts the sub-side hold information of the third area SRa3 to the sub of the fourth area SRa4. The side hold information is shifted to the third area SRa3.

Next, the data setting process of the second sub-side holding area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN of the second sub-side hold area SRb.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process for shifting the sub-side hold information stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the sub-side hold information stored in each area SRb1 to SRb4 to the first area SRb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information of the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, shifts the sub-side hold information of the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and shifts the sub-side hold information of the third area SRb3 to the sub of the fourth area SRb4. The side hold information is shifted to the third area SRb3.

After executing the process of step S2304 or step S2307, the MPU 52 sets the hold display shift time command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift time command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display shift command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the shift of the normal hold and the advance notice hold by the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the shifts of the normal hold and the advance notice hold on the display screen G and executes the shift.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a notice-holding pattern and a normal-holding pattern displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 62 has pedestals B11 to B14 provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the second sub-side holding area SRa. Execution pedestals provided between the pedestals B21 to B24 provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the area SRb and the pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE. AB is displayed on the display screen G.

The first holding lamp unit 371 is provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa from the left side to the right side. On the other hand, the pedestals B11 to B14 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa from the right side to the left side.
Further, the second holding lamp unit 372 is provided corresponding to four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb from the left side to the right side. Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb from the left side to the right side.

The pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB notify the player of the occurrence of the advance notice hold or the normal hold by placing the notice hold pattern or the normal hold pattern on the pedestal B11 to B14.
Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is normally stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. If this is the case, a white sphere pattern, which is usually a reserved pattern, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 identifies that the advance notice hold information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, A flashing white sphere pattern, which is a notice pending pattern, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.

Further, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. Places a white sphere pattern, which is usually a reserved pattern, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 specifies that the advance notice hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, A flashing white sphere pattern, which is a notice pending pattern, is placed on the pedestals B21 to B24.

Further, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the normal hold pattern is placed on the execution pedestal AB. Place the pattern of the white sphere that is.
The MPU 62 is a notice hold pattern on the execution pedestal AB when it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Place a flashing white sphere pattern.

Here, in the example of FIG. 26, in the MPU 62, the normally reserved pattern is placed on the pedestals B11 and B12, the notice reserved pattern is placed on the pedestal B13, and the normally reserved pattern is placed on the execution pedestal AB. Is placed. Further, in this example, the MPU 62 usually has a reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B21. Further, in this example, the MPU 62 does not have a pattern placed on the pedestals B14, B22 to B24.
In this reference form, the patterns of the normal hold and the advance notice hold are different from each other, but may be the same. Further, in the present reference embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB on the display screen G, but each pedestal may not be displayed on the display screen G.

<About the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG. 27.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that each command has been received in step S2401, in step S2402, the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not it is a "result".

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the MPU 52 executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S2403. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Determine the information related to the combination of symbols to have. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", the game result is "in step S2404" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result is "normally out of order".
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "unspecified small round high probability result", and the "explicit small round high probability result". In the case of any of the above, in step S2405, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 52 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 52 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 52 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 52 finally displays the stop display on the effective line L, and as a stop result, provides information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of each symbol described above. decide. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406, the MPU 52 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406. Then, the MPU 52 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 provides a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52. read out. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2408, or when it is determined in step S2401 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2413.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2409, the MPU 52 determines the type of the game result in step S2410 based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2411, the MPU 52 executes an effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2410. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2410 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "non-explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 52 is used for the open / close execution mode. Select production A as the production. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result", the MPU 52 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 52 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 52 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode.
The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S2412, the MPU 52 sets a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S2411. Then, the MPU 52 stores the open / close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This open / close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 36 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2412, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received in step S2409, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2413 and subsequent steps.
In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 52 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. After that, the MPU 52 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 1 has the winning / failing results of the “big hit winning” and the “special losing result”, the “unspecified small round high probability result”, and the “explicit” as the game results excluding the “normal loss result”. It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 28, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In this reference mode, the pachinko machine 1 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The content such as the game state is arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening / closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift in the "special loss result".
In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. doing.

Further, in the "special deviation result" and the "unspecified small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special deviation result" or an "unspecified small round high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 36 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. To. Further, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is 15 in a long time mode. Executed times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same stop result is an even number. In the case of, the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "best result" and "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the open / close execution mode is effect C, the player has the game result as the "most advantageous result". Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode, so that the game result is the "most advantageous result". And it is not possible to know whether it is a "low probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 36 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

Specifically, the symbol display device 36 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G, and in the high frequency support mode, the game times are completed as a reference number of times (specifically, 100). When the number of times is reached, an image notifying the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 36 finally produces the effect for the open / close execution mode in the game round after the end of the open / close execution mode. If so, disguise as if the game result was a "low probability result".

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 36 is in the high probability mode after 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. An image clearly indicating that is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 36 releases the camouflage that was applied as if the game result was a "low probability result".

[Modification of reference form]
The reference form of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned reference form, but includes modifications, improvements, and the like within a range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved.
(1) In the present reference mode, the pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the large winning opening 271 once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may open and close the large winning opening 271 a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In this reference embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or a game ball to the large winning opening 271. When the total number of winnings reached a predetermined upper limit, the opening / closing door 272 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In this reference embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state, the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 reaches eight, which is a predetermined upper limit. The opening / closing door 272 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 1, the upper limit number may be set to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be set with a different upper limit number depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be set with a different upper limit number for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening / closing door 272 to the open state, and then the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit. The 272 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an end trigger for setting the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state when the game ball enters, and this end occurs when a predetermined time elapses. It may be configured to allow entry into the trigger.
(5) In the present reference embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 272 is closed again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. It was set. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 272 is opened by a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning of the large winning opening 271 occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In the present reference embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state, the opening / closing door 272 is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the opening / closing door 272 to the open state and then shift to the next round game without setting the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state again.
(7) In this reference embodiment, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the launch cycle of the game ball and is n times or less (any of n = 1, 2, 3) of the launch cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed twice in the upper limit duration of the short mode and an open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the upper limit duration of the long mode. Had had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these in terms of the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 1 has a different degree of opening of the opening / closing door 272, such as half-opening or full-opening, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes by different aspects of the upper limit duration. , A configuration may be configured in which a plurality of types of open / close execution modes are set. Further, the mode of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it looks the same to the player.

(9) In this reference embodiment, the game result and the effect for the open / close execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the open / close execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, and may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. And the selection rate may be different depending on the game result.

(10) In this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 is an effective line when the game result is one of "special deviation result", "unspecified small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability result". The information related to the combination of special symbols was determined as the stop result to be finally displayed on L, and the combination of the special symbols was the same regardless of the type of the game result. On the other hand, the MPU 52 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result is.

(11) In this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the jackpot when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, the MPU 42 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery of the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.

(12) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of deviation results, a “special deviation result” and a “normal deviation result”, and the MPU 42 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the hit / fail table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442, the lottery for generating jackpots was executed. In other words, the MPU 42 executed the lottery related to the "special deviation result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. On the other hand, the MPU 42 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special deviation result", thereby causing the "special deviation". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In this reference mode, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the jackpot. Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the "special deviation result" is one. In other words, the probability of a "special out-of-order result" was set to be higher in the low-probability mode than in the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "special deviation result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. It may have been done. Further, the probability of becoming a "special deviation result" may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In this reference mode, the pachinko machine 1 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode, but the gaming states other than these. By setting, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by changing the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

(15) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 stores the hold information related to the upper operating port 25 in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating port 26 for the second result display unit. By storing in the holding area Rb, the holding information related to the upper operating port 25 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 26 were stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may store the hold information related to the upper operating port 25 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 26 together.
(16) In the present reference embodiment, the MPU 42 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operating port 26 for digestion of the game times regardless of whether or not there is the holding information related to the upper operating port 25. On the other hand, the MPU 42 may set the hold information related to the upper operation port 25 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 26 for digestion of the game times in the order of winning the respective hold information.

(17) In the present reference embodiment, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the voice emission control device 5, and the voice emission control device 5 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 6. , The control of the display control device 6 was being executed. On the other hand, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the display control device 6, and the display control device 6 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the voice emission control device 5, thereby controlling the voice emission control. The control of the device 5 may be executed. The command transmitted from the main control device 4 to the voice emission control device 5 and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 5 to the display control device 6 are not limited to the commands described in this reference embodiment and are arbitrary.
(18) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a voice emission control device 5, and a display control device 6 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 4.

(19) In the present reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for the game round is not limited to the effect described in this reference form, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the movable decorative member provided on the game board 2 in combination with the symbol display device 36. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 2 in combination with the symbol display device 36. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute the effect for game rotation by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 36.

(20) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 executes an internal lottery (win / fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winning a prize in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26, and then the main display unit 34 and The symbol display device 36 executes the variable display and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26 as the stop result of the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main display unit 34, and the main display unit 34 executes a variable display of a pattern and displays the result of an internal lottery as a stop result of the variable display. Was there. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 34 may display the same stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display, and by displaying the stop result at random, the inside may be displayed. The result of the lottery may not be identifiable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to include the main display unit 34.

(22) In the present reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 periodically scrolls the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbol, the effect for playing the game was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 36 may execute the effect for the game round on the display screen G by displaying the symbol (design) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 36 sets a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may be hidden during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, as the pattern to be displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Further, it may be difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters, colors, or patterns that are not easily identified by the player but are similar to each other or a combination thereof. According to this, for example, the manager of the pachinko / pachislot machine may win the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by visually observing the symbol display device 36 without visually observing the main display unit 34 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is performed to cause the pachinko machine 1 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. For example, the game machine is configured so that the player can output the optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and the information of the optical code is transmitted to the camera provided on the mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing the image, reading the image, and accessing the website. In addition, the game machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by inputting the password issued by the player to access the website into the game machine by operating the buttons provided on the game machine. You may.

(24) In the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been illustrated and described as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 1. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a gaming ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of gaming machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Reference form A]
Hereinafter, reference mode A of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of display control device>
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the reference embodiment A of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 29, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video. It is equipped with a RAM 67. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 63 and the work RAM 64. The MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 5, and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to execute the control of the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes control of the VDP65 by generating a command for the VDP65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is volatile that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a means of memory.

The VDP 65 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 36. Since the VDP65 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 36. The character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 36, and the display content of the symbol display device 36 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 67.

The video RAM 67 includes a decompression buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69.
As described above, the VDP 65 reads the image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary for displaying the image at the update timing of 1 in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is updated at the predetermined update timing. Say that.

Here, the frame buffer 69 includes a plurality of frame areas 691A and 692A. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 includes a first frame area 691A and a second frame area 692A.

The first frame region 691A includes a first layer 691A1, a second layer 691A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 691A1, and a third layer 691A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 691A2. By superimposing the layers 691A1 to 691A3 in the order of priority, the drawing data for one frame is stored.
The second frame area 692 includes a first layer 692A1, a second layer 692A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 692A1, and a third layer 692A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 692A2. By superimposing the layers 692A1 to 692A3 in the order of priority, the drawing data for one frame is stored.
In the following description, the first layer 691A1, 692A1 is also simply referred to as the first layer L1, the second layer 691A2, 692A2 is also simply referred to as the second layer L2, and the third layer 691A3, 692A3 is simply referred to as the third layer. Also referred to as layer L3.

Therefore, each of the layers L1 to L3 is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each layer L1 to L3 includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, each unit area adopts a full-color system, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each color of RGB, and has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes as a whole.

In the situation where drawing to the symbol display device 36 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area (for example, the first frame area 691), the VDP 65 has another frame area (for example, the second frame area 692). ), The drawing data to be used next is created. That is, the frame buffer 69 adopts the double buffer method.

Further, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and transmits the image signal to the symbol display device 36. Output. More specifically, the VDP 65 causes the drawing data to be transferred to the frame areas 691,692 to be output. The VDP 65 adjusts the resolution with a scaler (not shown) and converts it into gradation data so that the drawing data corresponds to the resolution of the symbol display device 36. Then, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the symbol display device 36.

In this reference mode, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute a process different from that of the reference mode. Specifically, in the present reference form, the hold generation process and the effect pattern determination process are different from the reference form. Hereinafter, the contents of the hold generation process and the effect pattern determination process in this reference embodiment will be described.

<Holding process>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 in substantially the same manner as in the reference mode. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the content of the hold occurrence command. In this reference mode, as shown in FIG. 30, the MPU 52 is different from the reference mode in that the process of steps S2204 is executed and then the processes of steps S2210A to S2212A are executed.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that the first hold generation command has been received, in step S2202, the MPU 52 grasps the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and determines the number of holds. The first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in a predetermined storage area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2201 that the MPU 52 has not received the first hold generation command (when it is determined that the second hold generation command has been received), the MPU 52 is in step S2203. The number of holds stored in the 2 sub-side hold area SRb is grasped, and the hold number is set as the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in a predetermined storage area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2204.

After executing the process of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates by adding 1 to the value of the sub-side start hold storage number SN (SRaN or SRbN) in step S2204.

In step S2210A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the current support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the content of the hold occurrence command.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low frequency support mode (when it is determined that the current support mode is the high frequency support mode), the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2205.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2211A.

First, in step S2210A, a process when the MPU 52 determines that the current support mode is not the low frequency support mode (processes after step S2205) will be described.
In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for holding the notice. In this notice hold lottery process, the MPU 52 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice hold.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The advance notice hold generation counter is provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the advance notice hold uses a notice display for changing the type of the hold pattern or the like in order to notify the player of the expected degree of the hold, and the production of the game times based on the hold that is digested before the hold. By doing so, it is a hold that executes a notice display or the like that generates a look-ahead effect that notifies the player of the expected degree of the hold. In this reference embodiment, the notice hold for executing the notice display that generates the look-ahead effect will be described, and the description for the notice hold for executing the other notice display will be omitted.

The notice hold occurrence counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The advance notice hold occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the advance notice hold occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (lottery for generating notice hold) as to whether or not to generate the notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the buffer for the notice hold occurrence counter. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the advance notice hold occurrence counter stored in the advance notice hold occurrence counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice hold occurrence counter to generate the advance notice hold. Execute the lottery. The notice hold generation table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the lottery for generating advance notice hold has been won (whether or not to generate advance notice hold) in step S2205.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that the advance notice hold is generated, the MPU 52 executes the advance notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating the notice hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the advance notice hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in step S2202, the MPU 52 is updated in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side hold area SRa, that is, in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN. For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set to "3" in step S2202, the MPU 52 corresponds to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN "4" updated in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is the storage area to be stored.

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side hold area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN. For example, when the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN is set to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 corresponds to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN "4" updated in step S2204. The notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is the storage area to be stored.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2207 that the advance notice hold is not generated, the MPU 52 executes the normal hold generation process in step S2209. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a normal hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the normal hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in step S2202, the MPU 52 is updated in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side hold area SRa, that is, in step S2204. Normal hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN. For example, when the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set to "3" in step S2202, the MPU 52 corresponds to the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN "4" updated in step S2204. Normally, hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area to be stored.

Further, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side hold area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The normal hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN. For example, when the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN is set to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 corresponds to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN "4" updated in step S2204. Normally, hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area to be stored.

Next, in step S2210A, processing when the current support mode is determined by the MPU 52 to be the low frequency support mode (processing after step S2211A) will be described.
In step S2211A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the second hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received (whether or not the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN is set in step S2203).

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that the second hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2205 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the second hold generation command has been received in step S2211A, the MPU 52 executes the special hold generation processing in step S2212A. In this special hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a special hold. Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the special hold generation process.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

Here, since the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN in step S2203, it is updated in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side hold area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The special hold information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN. For example, when the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN is set to "3" in step S2203, the MPU 52 corresponds to the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN "4" updated in step S2204. Special hold information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area to be stored.

In this way, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information as the sub-side hold information in each area SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the second hold occurrence command. Each area SRb1 to SRb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing special hold information for generating special hold.

After executing the advance notice hold generation process in step S2207, the normal hold generation process in step S2208, or the special hold generation process in step S2212A, the MPU 52 sets the hold display generation command in step S2209. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display occurrence command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the occurrence of the advance notice hold, the normal hold, or the special hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52. .. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold pattern, the normal hold picture, or the special hold picture on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the notice hold, the normal hold, or the special hold.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 programs a data table for executing the shift of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. Read from ROM 63. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G and executes the shift.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a notice hold pattern, a normal hold picture, and a special hold picture displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 62 has pedestals B11 to B14 provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the second sub-side holding area SRa. Execution pedestals provided between the pedestals B21 to B24 provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the area SRb and the pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE. AB is displayed on the display screen G.

The first holding lamp unit 371 is provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa from the left side to the right side. On the other hand, the pedestals B11 to B14 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa from the right side to the left side.
Further, the second holding lamp unit 372 is provided corresponding to four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb from the left side to the right side. Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb from the left side to the right side.

The pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB have a notice hold, a normal hold, or a special hold by placing a notice hold pattern, a normal hold picture, or a special hold picture on the pedestal AB. Is notified to the player.
Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is normally stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. If this is the case, a white sphere pattern, which is usually a reserved pattern, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 identifies that the advance notice hold information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, A flashing white sphere pattern, which is a notice pending pattern, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.

Further, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. Places a white sphere pattern, which is usually a reserved pattern, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 specifies that the advance notice hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, A flashing white sphere pattern, which is a notice pending pattern, is placed on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 identifies that the special hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, A black sphere pattern, which is a special reserved pattern, is placed on the pedestals B21 to B24.

Further, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the normal hold pattern is placed on the execution pedestal AB. Place the pattern of the white sphere that is.
The MPU 62 is a notice hold pattern on the execution pedestal AB when it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Place a flashing white sphere pattern.
The MPU 62 has a special hold pattern on the execution pedestal AB when it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Place a black sphere pattern.

Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the MPU 62 has a normally reserved pattern placed on the pedestals B11 and B12, a notice reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B13, and a normally reserved pattern on the execution pedestal AB. Is placed. Further, in this example, the MPU 62 has a special reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B21. In other words, in this example, the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Further, in this example, the MPU 62 does not have a pattern placed on the pedestals B14, B22 to B24.
In this reference form, the patterns of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold are different from each other, but any two pictures may be the same, or all the pictures may be the same. Further, in the present reference embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB on the display screen G, but each pedestal may not be displayed on the display screen G.

<About the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 substantially in the same manner as in the reference embodiment. In this reference mode, as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 52 is different from the reference mode in that the process of step S2407A is executed after executing any of the processes of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406. ..

In step S2407A, the MPU 52 executes the effect pattern determination process. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2407A, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the selected effect pattern.
Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect pattern determination process in order to select the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG. 33.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in the hold shift process is special hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special hold information, the MPU 52 executes the special hold effect determination process in step S3002. In this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect for digestion of the special hold. Further, based on the content of the special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special hold digestion effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes the special hold digestion effect on the display screen G.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information, the MPU 52 sets the special hold effect end command in step S3004. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 is drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52 (drawing data related to the special hold digestion effect). To clear.
In this reference embodiment, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information, the MPU 52 always sets the special hold effect end command in step S3004. The MPU 62 has cleared the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. On the other hand, the MPU 52 may set the special hold effect end command only when the drawing data is created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is the advance notice hold information.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the notice hold information is used, the MPU 52 executes the notice hold effect determination process in step S3006. In this advance notice hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect for digestion of the advance notice hold (look-ahead effect). Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the notice hold effect determination process.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for digesting the advance notice hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes the effect of holding the notice for digestion on the display screen G.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the flow of the look-ahead effect.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters "mystery" so as to fly around the entire display screen G. As a result, the look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is an effect for digesting the advance notice hold that notifies the player of the expected degree of the hold by using the effect of the game times based on the hold that is digested before the hold. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

In the look-ahead effect, the angel character is flown toward the center position with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position (see FIG. 34 (A)), and then the angel character is flown from that position toward the upper left position. (See FIG. 34 (B)). After that, the look-ahead effect starts the flight of the angel character by flying the angel character from the upper left position (position of FIG. 34 (B)) of the display screen G toward the upper right position (see FIG. 34 (C)). It is designed to return to the position. Then, as shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (C), the look-ahead effect is such that the angel character is made to fly in an infinite loop by flying the angel character again. Here, in this reference embodiment, the time required for one loop of the look-ahead effect is 10 sec.

Returning to the description of the effect pattern determination process, the processes after step S3008 will be described with reference to FIG. 33.
In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes the cumulative processing of the display duration. In this cumulative display duration process, the MPU 52 calculates the cumulative display duration based on the content of the variable command each time the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 is executed, and the cumulative time is stored in the RAM 54. Remember. In other words, the cumulative time of the display duration indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the look-ahead effect. Here, the notice hold effect command described above includes information related to the cumulative time of the display duration. Therefore, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point when the angel character is flown and the subsequent movement by receiving the information related to the cumulative time of the display duration from the MPU 52. The initial value of the cumulative time of the display duration is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not the advance notice hold information, the MPU 52 sets the advance notice hold effect end command in step S3009. Then, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice hold effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 is drawing data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52 (drawing data related to the effect for digestion of the advance notice hold). To clear.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes a cumulative reset process of the display duration. In this cumulative display duration reset process, the MPU 52 resets by substituting "0" for the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3008, or after executing the process of step S3010, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. After that, the MPU 52 ends the effect pattern determination process. In other processing, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display other than the look-ahead effect.

<About the occurrence of look-ahead production and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. Specifically, FIG. 35A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 35 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 35 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 35 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.
In this example, the MPU 52 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and the normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE. It is specified that there is.

As shown in FIG. 35 (A), the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal hold information stored in the execution area SAE.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that the advance notice hold is generated, the advance notice hold generation process is executed in step S2207, and the advance notice hold information is stored in the first free storage area of the sub-side hold area. It is stored in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the notice hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, , A flashing white sphere pattern, which is a notice pending pattern, is placed on the pedestal B13. Here, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the VDP 65 displays the advance notice pending pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. ..

In the example of FIG. 35, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for digestion of the special hold, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 35 (C). Not created. Further, in the example of FIG. 35, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for digestion of the advance notice hold, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 35 (D). Not created.

FIG. 36 shows a display screen of the symbol display device and a frame buffer when the first hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. It is a figure which shows each layer of. Specifically, FIG. 36A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 36 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 36 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 36 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the MPU 62 is a white sphere which is a normal hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the white sphere pattern, which is a normally reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. The flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending pattern placed on the pedestal B13, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B12. Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the VDP 65 creates a drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display a normal hold pattern and a notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 36A, the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 has started the variation display based on the variation start command related to the normal hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is the notice hold information, and determines in step S3005 that it is the notice hold information. Executes the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006, and sets the advance notice hold effect command in step S3007.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the effect for digesting the advance notice hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36A, the MPU 62 is a symbol display device 36 so as to make an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters “mysterious” fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 36, a hold related to a normal hold pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB and the pedestal B11). By using the effect of the times, for digestion of the notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 36, the hold related to the notice hold pattern placed on the pedestal B12). It is a production. Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Further, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 receives the first notice hold effect command after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub side hold area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative time of the display duration included in this notice hold effect command is "0". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36D, the MPU 62 makes the angel character fly with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position.

In the example of FIG. 36, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for digestion of the special hold, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 36 (C). Not created.

<About the flow when the normal hold is exhausted after the pre-reading effect occurs>
FIG. 37 shows a display screen of the symbol display device and a frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. It is a figure which shows each layer of. Specifically, FIG. 37A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 37 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 37 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 37 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the MPU 62 is a white sphere which is a normal hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. To do. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the VDP 65 creates a drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display a normal hold pattern and a notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A), the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 has started the variation display based on the variation start command related to the normal hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is the notice hold information, and determines in step S3005 that it is the notice hold information. Executes the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006, and sets the advance notice hold effect command in step S3007.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the effect for digesting the advance notice hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the MPU 62 is a symbol display device 36 so as to make an angel character carrying a sign displaying the character "mystery" fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect utilizes the effect of the game times based on the hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold related to the normal hold pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB). By doing so, it is an effect for digesting the advance notice hold that notifies the player of the degree of expectation of the hold (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold related to the notice hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11). Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Further, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 receives the second notice hold effect command after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub side hold area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative time of the display duration included in this advance notice hold effect command is the same as the display duration of the previous game times. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (D), the MPU 62 flies the angel character starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 relates to drawing data (related to the effect for digesting the advance notice hold) created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. Clear the drawing data). In other words, in the example of FIG. 37, since the MPU 62 receives the advance notice hold effect end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, the third frame buffer 69 is based on this advance notice hold effect end command. The drawing data created on the layer L3 (drawing data related to the effect for digestion of the notice hold) is cleared.

In the example of FIG. 37, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for digestion of the special hold, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 37 (C). Not created.

<About the flow when the special hold is exhausted after the look-ahead effect occurs>
In FIG. 38, after it is specified that the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area, the first hold shift process is executed, and then the first hold area of the second sub-side hold area is executed. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device, and each layer of a frame buffer when it is specified that the special hold information is stored in an area. In other words, FIG. 38 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area after the state shown in FIG. 36. , Each layer of the frame buffer. Specifically, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 38 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 38 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 38 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the MPU 62 is a white sphere which is a normal hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the white sphere pattern, which is a normally reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. The flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending pattern placed on the pedestal B13, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B12. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the VDP 65 creates a drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display a normal hold pattern and a notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 38A, the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 has started the variation display based on the variation start command related to the normal hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is the notice hold information, and determines in step S3005 that it is the notice hold information. Executes the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006, and sets the advance notice hold effect command in step S3007.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the effect for digesting the advance notice hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the MPU 62 is a symbol display device 36 so as to make an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters "mystery" fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 38, a hold related to a normal hold pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB and the pedestal B11). By using the effect of the times, for digestion of the notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 38, the hold related to the notice hold pattern placed on the pedestal B12). It is a production. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Further, in the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 receives the first notice hold effect command after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub side hold area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative time of the display duration included in this notice hold effect command is "0". Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (D), the MPU 62 makes the angel character fly with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the second hold generation command has been received in step S2211A, the MPU 52 executes the special hold generation processing in step S2212A and transmits the special hold information to the free storage area of the sub-side hold area. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the special hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the special hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the special hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, , A black sphere pattern, which is a special reserved pattern, is placed on the pedestal B21. Here, as shown in FIG. 38B, the VDP 65 displays the special reserved pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. ..

In the example of FIG. 38, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for digestion of the special hold, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 38 (C). Not created.

FIG. 39 shows a display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub side hold area. It is a figure which shows. Specifically, FIG. 39A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 39 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 39 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 39 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the MPU 62 is a black sphere which is a special reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B21 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB. Here, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 has a normal hold pattern and a notice hold pattern. And a special hold pattern is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 39 (A), the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 39, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the special hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information, and if it is determined in step S3001 that it is special hold information, step S3002 In step S3003, the special hold effect determination process is executed, and the special hold effect command is set.
Then, the MPU 62 displays and executes the special hold digestion effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the characters "Chance if it reaches reach!" At the upper part of the display screen G, and displays the treasure chest and this treasure chest. By displaying the character of the angel to be opened in the center of the display screen G, the effect for digestion of the special hold is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the VDP 65 creates a drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, thereby producing a special hold digestion effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

Further, the VDP 65 stores the data related to the special hold digestion effect in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. There is. Specifically, the VDP 65 darkens the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that the player cannot see the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. The data related to the special hold digestion effect is stored in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of FIG. 39, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect of holding the notice for digestion, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 39 (D). Not created (the angel character is stationary without flying around). In other words, the position of the angel is stationary at the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

Then, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52. The subsequent flow is the same as the flow when the normal hold is exhausted after the pre-reading effect occurs (see FIG. 37).

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 relates to drawing data (related to the special hold digestion effect) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. Clear the drawing data). As a result, the layers L1 to L3 of the frame buffer 69 are in the same state as in FIG. 37.
As described above, since the position of the angel is stationary at the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect, the MPU 62 is based on the special hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. By clearing the drawing data (drawing data related to the special hold digestion effect) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, the look-ahead effect can be resumed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Can be done.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 functions as a variation display means for executing the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. Further, in the present reference embodiment, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as effect execution means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute the effect.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 is a predetermined period (cumulative time of display duration) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 (establishment of the first opportunity). It functions as a first effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect (first effect).
Further, in the present reference embodiment, the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 is performed during a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 (establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger). It functions as a second effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a special hold digestion effect (second effect) that overlaps with the look-ahead effect and is different from the look-ahead effect.
Then, in the present reference form, the advance notice hold effect determination process continuously executes the look-ahead effect after the end of the special hold digestion effect.
In this reference mode, the continuous execution of the first effect is not limited to the state in which the first effect is operated after the end of the second effect, and is displayed on the symbol display device 36. For example, it shall include a state in which it is not operating (a state in which it is stationary).

According to this, the pachinko machine 1 has a special hold digestion even in a state where the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. The pre-reading effect can be continuously executed after the special hold digestion effect is completed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play comfortably.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the look-ahead effect when the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process (angel). The character is in a stationary state without flying around), and when the symbol display device 36 terminates the special hold digestion effect in the special hold effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 restarts the look-ahead effect. There is.

According to this, in the advance notice hold effect determination process, when the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 interrupts the look-ahead effect, and the special hold effect is produced. When the symbol display device 36 terminates the special hold digestion effect in the determination process, the symbol display device 36 restarts the look-ahead effect, so that the look-ahead effect is interrupted even when the look-ahead effect is being executed. The special hold digestion effect can be executed, and the look-ahead effect can be restarted after the special hold digestion effect is completed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can surely entertain the player with the look-ahead effect.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 causes the symbol display device 36 to pre-read by storing the data related to the pre-reading effect in the third layer L3 (first effect layer) of the frame buffer 69. The effect (first effect) is executed, and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 transfers the data related to the effect for digestion of the special hold to the frame buffer 69 having a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. By storing the data in the second layer L2 (second effect layer), the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the special hold digestion effect (second effect).
Further, in the present reference embodiment, the frame buffer 69 displays an image on the symbol display device 36 by superimposing a plurality of layers (each layer L1 to L3) including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in the order of priority. It functions as an image compositing means to be displayed.
Then, in the special hold effect determination process of step S3002, the data related to the special hold digestion effect is transferred to the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. It is stored in the two-layer L2.

According to this, the frame buffer 69 causes the symbol display device 36 to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in the order of priority. On the third layer L3 that stores the data related to the look-ahead effect based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25, the game ball enters the lower operation port 26 by the special hold effect determination process. The image can be displayed on the symbol display device 36 by superimposing the second layer L2 that stores the data related to the special hold digestion effect based on the above. Then, the special hold effect determination process stores the data related to the special hold digestion effect in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3. Even in the state where the look-ahead effect based on the entry of the game ball into the 25 is executed, the effect for digestion of the special hold based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 is overwritten and executed. After the special hold digestion effect is completed, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 is performed by erasing the data related to the special hold digestion effect stored in the second layer L2. Can be continuously executed.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. Functions as a storage means.
The sub-side hold information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) for storing the hold information during which the symbol display device 36 is executing the variation display, and the execution area SAE (execution area) before the symbol display device 36 executes the variation display. It includes a first sub-side hold area SRa and a second sub-side hold area SRb (a plurality of hold areas) for storing hold information in the hold state.

Further, the hold determination process in step S2002 is used as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the upper operation port 25 or the lower operation port 26. Function.
Further, the hold determination process in step S2002 is the process of step S2202 in which the hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold area) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 ( Based on the first holding storage means) and the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26, the holding information is stored in the second sub holding area SRb (second holding area) different from the first sub holding area SRa. The process of storing step S2203 (second hold storage means) and the hold shift of step S2104 for shifting the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. It is equipped with processing (holding shift means).
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE.

According to this, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. Therefore, even in a state where the look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is being executed, the second sub-side hold is held based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26. It is possible to execute an effect for digesting a special hold based on the hold information stored in the area SRb.

In the present reference embodiment, the hold shift process in step S2104 preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, but the second sub side hold area. It is not necessary to preferentially shift the hold information stored in the SRb toward the execution area SAE. For example, the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is inserted. It may be shifted toward the execution area SAE in order.

Further, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. In this state, when the effect for digesting the special hold based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb is to be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26, the look-ahead effect Will impair the continuity of. According to this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a special hold even when the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. It is possible to execute the effect for digestion of, and after the special hold effect for digestion is completed, the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed, so that the player is comfortable without impairing the continuity of the look-ahead effect. Can be played.

In this reference form, the first effect is a look-ahead effect, but for example, another effect such as a notice display for changing the type of the reserved pattern in order to notify the player of the expected degree of the hold. There may be.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second effect is a special hold digestion effect, but for example, it may be an effect that encourages the player to press the push button, and the symbol display device 36 may be used. The effect may be such that the image displayed on the display screen G is gradually enlarged. Further, the second effect is not limited to the effect of displaying an image on the symbol display device 36, and may be, for example, an effect of driving an accessory. In short, the first effect and the second effect may be any effect, and the second effect may be an effect that is executed overlapping with the first effect. Here, in the present reference embodiment, the duplication means a state in which the first effect cannot be visually recognized by executing the second effect.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the hold generation process in step S2102 displays the hold pattern associated with the hold information based on the hold information (sub-side hold information) stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543. It functions as an information notification means to be displayed on the device 36.
Then, in the hold generation process of step S2102, the hold picture is stored in the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the hold picture in the first layer L1 (layer for hold picture) having a higher priority than the second layer L2. It is displayed.

According to this, in the hold generation process, the hold picture is displayed on the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the hold picture in the first layer L1 having a higher priority than the second layer L2, so that the look-ahead effect is produced. And when the effect for digestion of special hold is executed, the hold picture can be surely displayed on the symbol display device 36 without overwriting the hold picture displayed on the symbol display device 36.

In the present reference embodiment, in the hold generation process, the hold picture is displayed on the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the hold picture in the first layer L1 having a higher priority than the second layer L2. ..
On the other hand, the information notification means may display the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer.
According to this, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer, and thus the first effect. And when the second effect is executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. In addition, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved pattern on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second effect means immediately terminates the special hold digestion effect on the symbol display device 36 by setting the special hold effect end command in step S3004.
According to this, since the second effect means immediately terminates the special hold digestion effect collectively on the symbol display device 36, the special hold digestion effect can be quickly terminated.

In the present reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 uses the data related to the look-ahead effect (first effect) as the third effect of the frame buffer 69 based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. By storing it in the layer L3 (first effect layer), it functions as a first effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute the look-ahead effect, and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 is a game to the lower operation port 26. Based on the entry of the ball, the data related to the special hold digestion effect (second effect) different from the look-ahead effect is stored in the second layer of the frame buffer 69, which has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. By storing it in L2 (second effect layer), it functions as a second effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a special hold digestion effect.

On the other hand, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 are used for the data related to the look-ahead effect (first effect) and the effect for digesting the special hold (second effect). By storing the data in the same layer, the symbol display device 36 may be made to execute the look-ahead effect and the special hold digestion effect.
Further, in the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002, the look-ahead effect and the special hold digestion are performed on the symbol display device 36 based on the entry of the game ball into the same starting ball entry means. You may execute the production for.

In this way, the first effect means and the second effect means execute the specific effect on the variable display means by storing the data related to the specific effect in the specific effect layer based on the establishment of the specific opportunity. It suffices if it functions as a specific effect means to make it.
Then, in the present reference embodiment, in the hold generation process of step S2102, the data related to the common image (holding pattern and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) different from the specific effect is converted into the specific effect layer (second layer L2 and second layer). A common image is displayed on the symbol display device 36 by storing it in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the three layers L3).

According to this, in the hold generation process of step S2102, the data related to the common image (holding pattern and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3) different from the look-ahead effect and the special hold digestion effect is set to the specific effect layer (third). By storing the image in the common layer (first layer L1), which has a higher priority than the second layer L2 and the third layer L3), the symbol display device 36 displays the common image. It is possible to reliably display the common image on the symbol display device 36 without overwriting the common image displayed on the symbol display device 36 when executing the effect.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second distribution table referred to when the lottery of the jackpot type is performed with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 26 is the upper operating port 25. Compared with the first distribution table referred to when the lottery of the jackpot type is performed with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning, it is easier to sort the value into the "most advantageous result". In other words, the special hold digestion effect (second effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26 is the look-ahead effect based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25 (first effect). ) Is more useful for players.

According to this, since the special hold digestion effect is more useful for the player than the look-ahead effect, the player pays attention to whether or not the special hold digestion effect is executed during the predetermined period. Will be done. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In this reference form, the second effect is more useful for the player than the first effect because it is easier to sort into the "most advantageous result", but the second effect is , The production may be more useful to the player than the first production, and any production may be adopted for the first production and the second production.
For example, it is configured to execute the first game round based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the second game round based on the entry into the second start ball entry portion in parallel. In the game machine, when the second game is won or is likely to be won, the second effect is performed in the second game, overlapping with the first effect being executed in the first game. By executing the second effect, the second effect may be more useful to the player than the first effect.
Further, for example, in a game machine configured to execute the electric service game times related to the electric accessory opening lottery based on entering the through gate in the open / close execution mode, the electric service game times are won or won. In such a case, the second effect is more useful for the player than the first effect by executing the second effect in the electric game game in duplicate with the first effect in the open / close execution mode. It may be a directing.

Further, in the present reference form, the MPU 62 displays a look-ahead effect by displaying the angel character carrying the signboard displaying the characters "mystery" on the symbol display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G. Was running. Then, the MPU 62 displays an angel character carrying a sign displaying the character "mystery" over the entire display screen G when the look-ahead effect is continuously executed after the special hold digestion effect is completed. The look-ahead effect was executed by displaying the symbol display device 36 so as to fly around. In other words, the look-ahead effect was one type of effect.

On the other hand, the first effect means may cause the variable display means to execute the first effect having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. For example, the MPU 62 produces a low-expectation look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters "mystery" on the symbol display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G. By executing and displaying the angel character carrying the signboard displaying the characters "heat" on the symbol display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, a high-expected look-ahead effect is executed. You may.

Then, when the variable display means is made to execute the first effect having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period, the first effect means causes the second effect means to execute the second effect. The expectation level of the first effect may be changed during the overlapping period. For example, the MPU 62 executes a look-ahead effect by displaying an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters "mystery" on the symbol display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, thereby performing a special look-ahead effect. When the look-ahead effect is to be continuously executed after the hold digestion effect is completed, the design is such that the angel character carrying the sign displaying the characters "heat" is made to fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect may be executed by displaying the display on the display device 36.

According to this, the pachinko machine 1 has a special hold digestion even in a state where the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. It is possible to change the expectation level of the look-ahead effect during the overlapping period in which the effect for digestion of the special hold is executed in the special hold effect determination process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this reference form as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 is for special hold digestion even in a state where the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. The effect can be executed, and the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed after the special hold digestion effect is completed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play comfortably.
(2) In the advance notice hold effect determination process, when the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 interrupts the look-ahead effect, and the special hold effect determination process is performed. When the symbol display device 36 terminates the special hold digestion effect, the symbol display device 36 restarts the look-ahead effect, so that the look-ahead effect is interrupted even when the look-ahead effect is being executed. The special hold digestion effect can be executed, and the look-ahead effect can be restarted after the special hold digestion effect is completed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can surely entertain the player with the look-ahead effect.

(3) The frame buffer 69 causes the symbol display device 36 to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in the order of priority. Based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operation port 26 by the special hold effect determination process on the third layer L3 that stores the data related to the look-ahead effect based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation port 25. An image can be displayed on the symbol display device 36 by superimposing the second layer L2 that stores the data related to the special hold digestion effect. Then, the special hold effect determination process stores the data related to the special hold digestion effect in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3. Even in the state where the look-ahead effect based on the entry of the game ball into the 25 is executed, the effect for digestion of the special hold based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 is overwritten and executed. After the special hold digestion effect is completed, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 is performed by erasing the data related to the special hold digestion effect stored in the second layer L2. Can be continuously executed.

(4) Since the hold shift process shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE, the hold information is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. Even when the look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is being executed, the second sub-side hold area SRb is based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26. It is possible to execute a special hold digestion effect based on the hold information stored in.
(5) The pachinko machine 1 is for special hold digestion even in a state where the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. Since the effect can be executed and the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed after the special hold digestion effect is completed, the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the look-ahead effect. it can.

(6) In the hold generation process, the hold picture is displayed on the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the hold picture in the first layer L1 having a higher priority than the second layer L2, so that the look-ahead effect and the special When the effect for digestion of the hold is executed, the hold picture can be surely displayed on the symbol display device 36 without overwriting the hold picture displayed on the symbol display device 36.
(7) Since the second effect means immediately terminates the special hold digestion effect collectively on the symbol display device 36, the special hold digestion effect can be quickly terminated.

[Reference form B]
Hereinafter, reference mode B of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.
In the reference form A, the advance notice hold effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the look-ahead effect when the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process (Angel's). (The character is in a stationary state without flying around), and when the special hold effect determination process ends the special hold digestion effect, the symbol display device 36 restarts the look-ahead effect. ..
On the other hand, in the present reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process continues the look-ahead effect during the overlapping period in which the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process. It is different from the reference mode A in that it is executed.

In the present reference embodiment, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute a process different from that of the reference embodiment A. Specifically, in this reference form, the process of determining the effect pattern is different from that of the reference form A. Hereinafter, the content of the effect pattern determination process in this reference embodiment will be described.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an effect pattern determination process according to the reference embodiment B of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect pattern determination process in order to select the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 in the same manner as in the reference mode A. In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 52 is different from the reference embodiment A in that the process of step S3003 is executed and then the process of step S3012B is executed.

In step S3012B, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is the advance notice hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is pending notice information, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S3006 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is not the advance notice hold information, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S3011 described above.
As described above, in the present reference embodiment, when it is specified that the advance notice hold information is stored in the storage area of the sub-side hold area, the MPU 52 performs the special hold digestion effect in the special hold effect determination process. At the same time, the pre-reading effect is executed in the advance notice hold effect determination process.

<About the flow when the special hold is exhausted after the look-ahead effect occurs>
FIG. 41 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub side hold area. It is a figure which shows. In other words, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a case where the special hold digestion effect is executed after the state of FIG. 38 in the reference form A is reached. Specifically, FIG. 41 (A) is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 41 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 41 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 41 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the MPU 62 is a black sphere which is a special reserved pattern placed on the pedestal B21 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB. Here, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 displays the normal hold pattern and the advance notice hold pattern. And a special hold pattern is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41 (A), the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 has started the variation display based on the variation start command related to the special hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information, and if it is determined in step S3001 that it is special hold information, step S3002 In step S3003, the special hold effect determination process is executed, and the special hold effect command is set.
Then, the MPU 62 displays and executes the special hold digestion effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the characters "Chance if it reaches reach!" At the upper part of the display screen G, and displays the treasure chest and this treasure chest. By displaying the character of the angel to be opened in the center of the display screen G, the effect for digestion of the special hold is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), the VDP 65 creates drawing data on the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, thereby producing a special hold digestion effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

Further, the VDP 65 stores the data related to the special hold digestion effect in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. There is. Specifically, the VDP 65 darkens the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that the player cannot see the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. The data related to the special hold digestion effect is stored in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3012B is the notice hold information, and determines in step S3012B that it is the notice hold information. Executes the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006, and sets the advance notice hold effect command in step S3007.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the effect for digesting the advance notice hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the MPU 62 is a symbol display device 36 so as to make an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters "mystery" fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 41, a hold related to a normal hold pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB and the pedestal B11). By using the effect of the times, the player is notified of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 41, the hold related to the notice hold pattern placed on the pedestal B12) for digestion of the notice hold. It is a production. Here, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Further, in the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 receives the second notice hold effect command after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub side hold area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative time of the display duration included in this advance notice hold effect command is the same as the display duration of the previous game times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the MPU 62 flies the angel character starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

FIG. 42 shows a display screen of the symbol display device and a frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. It is a figure which shows each layer of. Specifically, FIG. 42A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 42 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 42 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 42 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), the MPU 62 is a white sphere which is a normal hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. To do. Here, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), the VDP 65 creates a drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display a normal hold pattern and a notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 has started the variation display based on the variation start command related to the normal hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is the notice hold information, and determines in step S3005 that it is the notice hold information. Executes the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006, and sets the advance notice hold effect command in step S3007.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the effect for digesting the advance notice hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), the MPU 62 is a symbol display device 36 so as to make an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters “mysterious” fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect utilizes the effect of the game times based on the hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the normal hold pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB). By this means, it is an effect for digesting the advance notice hold that notifies the player of the degree of expectation of the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the advance notice hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11). Here, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Further, in the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 receives the third notice hold effect command after it is specified that the notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub side hold area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative display duration included in this advance notice hold effect command is the same as the total display duration of the previous and previous game times. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (D), the MPU 62 flies the angel character starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 relates to drawing data (related to the effect for digesting the advance notice hold) created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. Clear the drawing data). In other words, in the example of FIG. 42, since the MPU 62 receives the advance notice hold effect end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, the third frame buffer 69 is based on this advance notice hold effect end command. The drawing data created on the layer L3 (drawing data related to the effect for digestion of the notice hold) is cleared.

In the example of FIG. 42, since the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for digestion of the special hold, the VDP 65 displays the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 as shown in FIG. 42 (C). Not created.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process continues the look-ahead effect during the overlapping period in which the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process. I'm running it.

According to this, in the advance notice hold effect determination process, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed during the overlapping period in which the symbol display device 36 is executing the effect for digestion of the special hold in the special hold effect determination process. The look-ahead effect can be continuously executed regardless of the special hold digestion effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to enjoy the flow of the look-ahead effect.

According to this reference form as described above, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1), (3) to (7) in the reference form A, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(8) In the advance notice hold effect determination process, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed during the overlapping period in which the symbol display device 36 is executing the special hold digestion effect in the special hold effect determination process. It is possible to continuously execute the look-ahead effect regardless of the effect for digestion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to enjoy the flow of the look-ahead effect.

[Reference Form C]
Hereinafter, reference mode C of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the reference mode A, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect end command in step S3004 and controls the display. The MPU 62 of the device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the special hold digestion effect) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. Was.
On the other hand, in the present reference embodiment, the MPU 52 shifts to the storage area of the sub-side hold area even when it is determined that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information. When the sub-side hold information is the notice hold information, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 is different from the reference mode A in that the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 is not immediately cleared. ..

In the present reference embodiment, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute a process different from that of the reference embodiment A. Specifically, in this reference form, the process of determining the effect pattern is different from that of the reference form A. Hereinafter, the content of the effect pattern determination process in this reference embodiment will be described.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect pattern determination process according to the reference embodiment C of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect pattern determination process in order to select the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG. 43.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in the hold shift process is special hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special hold information, the MPU 52 executes the special hold effect determination process in step S3002. In this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect for digestion of the special hold. Further, based on the content of the special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special hold digestion effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes the special hold digestion effect on the display screen G.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not the special hold information, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S3005.
In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is the advance notice hold information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the notice hold information is used, the MPU 52 executes the notice hold effect determination process in step S3006. In this advance notice hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect for digestion of the advance notice hold (look-ahead effect). Further, based on the content of the advance notice hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for digesting the advance notice hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes the effect of holding the notice for digestion on the display screen G.

In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes the cumulative processing of the display duration. In this cumulative display duration process, the MPU 52 calculates the cumulative display duration based on the content of the variable command each time the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 is executed, and the cumulative time is stored in the RAM 54. Remember. In other words, the cumulative time of the display duration indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the look-ahead effect. Here, the notice hold effect command described above includes information related to the cumulative time of the display duration. Therefore, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point when the angel character is flown and the subsequent movement by receiving the information related to the cumulative time of the display duration from the MPU 52. The initial value of the cumulative time of the display duration is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

In step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect fade-out command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect fade-out command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect fade-out command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect fade-out command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 is drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect fade-out command transmitted from the MPU 52 (drawing data related to the effect for digestion of the special hold). Is cleared so as to fade out from the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 toward the periphery.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not the advance notice hold information, the MPU 52 sets the advance notice hold effect end command in step S3009. Then, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice hold effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 is drawing data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52 (drawing data related to the effect for digestion of the advance notice hold). To clear.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes a cumulative reset process of the display duration. In this cumulative display duration reset process, the MPU 52 resets by substituting "0" for the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54.

In step S3004C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 is drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52 (drawing data related to the special hold digestion effect). To clear.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3013C, or after executing the process of step S3004C, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. After that, the MPU 52 ends the effect pattern determination process. In other processing, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display other than the look-ahead effect.

<About the flow when the special hold is exhausted after the look-ahead effect occurs>
In FIG. 44, after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, the special hold digestion effect is terminated, and the advance notice hold digestion effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display apparatus in the case, and each layer of a frame buffer. In other words, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where the special hold digestion effect is terminated and the advance notice hold digestion effect is executed after the state of FIG. 39 in the reference form A is reached. Specifically, FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Further, FIG. 44 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 44 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 44 (D) is a diagram. , The third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 is shown.

The MPU 62 executes by displaying the shifts of the normal hold, the advance notice hold, and the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the MPU 62 is a white sphere which is a normal hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. The pattern of is shifted and placed on the execution pedestal AB, and the flashing white sphere pattern, which is the notice pending pattern placed on the pedestal B12, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B11. To do. Here, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the VDP 65 creates a drawing data on the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 to display a normal hold pattern and a notice hold pattern on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 44A, the MPU 62 has a plurality of symbol strings Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command transmitted from the MPU 52 (see FIG. 3). By starting the fluctuation display of, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 44, the MPU 62 has started the variation display based on the variation start command related to the normal hold information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the hold shift process.

After that, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery by displaying the combination of various symbols as a stop result on the effective line L based on the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the VDP 65 creates a plurality of symbol strings on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, when the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is the notice hold information, and determines in step S3005 that it is the notice hold information. Executes the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006, and sets the advance notice hold effect command in step S3007.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the effect for digesting the advance notice hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the advance notice hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44A, the MPU 62 is a symbol display device 36 so as to make an angel character carrying a sign displaying the characters “mysterious” fly around the entire display screen G. The look-ahead effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect utilizes the effect of the game times based on the hold that is digested before the hold (in the example of FIG. 44, the hold related to the normal hold pattern placed on the execution pedestal AB). By this means, it is an effect for digesting the advance notice hold that notifies the player of the degree of expectation of the hold (in the example of FIG. 44, the hold related to the notice hold pattern placed on the pedestal B11). Here, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

After that, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that it is the advance notice hold information, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect fade-out command in step S3013C.
Then, the MPU 62 is based on the special hold effect fade-out command transmitted from the MPU 52, and as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the drawing data (for digestion of the special hold) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. (Drawing data related to the effect of) is cleared so as to fade out from the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 toward the periphery.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the process of step S3013C functions as a second effect means for terminating the pattern display device 36 so as to fade out the effect for digestion of the special hold.
According to this, since the process of step S3013C ends the symbol display device 36 so as to fade out the special hold digestion effect, the special hold digestion effect ends without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Can be made to.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the process of step S3013C, after the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the look-ahead effect in the advance notice hold effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 ends the special hold digestion effect. ..
According to this, the process of step S3013C is stopped because the symbol display device 36 terminates the special hold digestion effect after causing the symbol display device 36 to execute the look-ahead effect in the advance notice hold effect determination process. The images of the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 can be changed at the same time without allowing the player to visually recognize the angel character in the state, and the special hold digestion can be performed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to end the effect of and execute the look-ahead effect.

According to this reference form as described above, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (6) in the reference form A, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(9) Since the process of step S3013C ends the symbol display device 36 so as to fade out the special hold digestion effect, the special hold digestion effect can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. Can be done.
(10) In the process of step S3013C, after the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the look-ahead effect in the advance notice hold effect determination process, the symbol display device 36 ends the special hold digestion effect, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to end the special hold digestion effect and execute the look-ahead effect without having to remember.

[Reference form D]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment D of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment D of the present invention.
In the present reference form, as shown in FIG. 45, the center frame 37 is different from the reference form in that it includes a two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the symbol display device 36.
The two-stage stage 7 flows down the game area with the upper stage 71 arranged on the vertically upper side (display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and the lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71. A stage distribution mechanism 73 for distributing the game ball to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 is provided.

FIG. 46 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 47 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the upper stage 71 directs the rolling surface 74 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area and the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. It is provided with a guide path 75 that guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and the upper stage is reached by the stage distribution mechanism 73. By being distributed to 71, it reaches the rolling surface 74.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed so as to be gently curved so as to rise toward both the horizontal left and right sides, with the vertically upper position of the upper operating port 25 as the lowest position. The rolling surface 74 is located above the upper operating port 25 and is located adjacent to the concave portion 741 which is gently depressed and the concave portion 741 on both the left and right sides of the concave portion 741 and is gently depressed. It has a concave portion 742.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that inclines so as to descend toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of the inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to descend toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball moves in the horizontal and horizontal directions to roll the rolling surface 74, and then travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 to enter the guide path 75, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that falls into the game area along the route. Specifically, the upper stage 71 of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 by setting the tilt angle of the rolling surface 74, the tilt angle of the concave portion 741 and each concave portion 742, and the like. It is configured so that 40% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the route falling into the game area.

The guide path 75 has an upper introduction section 751 capable of inserting a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 into the inside, and a discharge section 752 for ejecting the game ball entered from the upper introduction section 751 into the game area and dropping the ball. And have. Here, the upper stage 71 is formed of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game ball that has entered the inside of the guide path 75 can be visually recognized.

Further, the guide path 75 is a left guide portion 753 and a left guide portion 753 that guide the game ball that has entered the upper introduction portion 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guide the game ball in the horizontal left direction. After the game ball guided in the horizontal left direction is dropped toward the lower side of the game board 2 to be guided, the right guide portion 754 and the right guide portion 754 guide the game ball in the horizontal right direction in the horizontal right direction. It is provided with a front guide portion 755 for guiding the game ball guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharging the game ball from the discharge portion 752 provided in the game area to drop the game ball.
Here, since the discharge unit 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route entering the guide path 75 wins the upper operating port 25. It will be easier to do.

The lower stage 72 guides the rolling surface 76 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area and the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 76 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then plays the game ball. It is provided with a guide path 77 for guiding toward the front of the board 2.

The rolling surface 76 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and the stage distribution mechanism 73 lowers the stage. By being distributed to 72, it reaches the rolling surface 76.

Further, the rolling surface 76 is located above the upper operating port 25 and has a mountain-shaped portion that protrudes vertically upward and two valley-shaped portions that are located on both the left and right sides of the mountain-shaped portion and are depressed vertically downward. It is formed with a large curvature as compared with the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The rolling surface 76 is located above the upper working port 25 (the top of the mountain-shaped portion) and is located at the concave portion 761 that gently sinks, and the two concave portions that are located at the bottom of the valley-shaped portion and are gently depressed. It has 762 and.

The concave portion 761 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to descend toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of the inclined surface is connected to the guide path 77.
Each concave portion 762 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to descend toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball moves back and forth in the horizontal and horizontal directions to roll the rolling surface 76, and then travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 761 to enter the guide path 77, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 762. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that falls into the game area along the route. Specifically, the lower stage 72 of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 by setting the tilt angle of the rolling surface 76, the tilt angle of the concave portion 761 and each concave portion 762, and the like. It is configured so that 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are distributed to the route falling into the game area.

The guide path 77 has a lower introduction section 771 that allows a game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 76 to enter inside, and a discharge section 772 that discharges the game ball that has entered from the lower introduction section 771 into the game area and drops it. (Discharge unit 752) is provided. In this reference embodiment, the discharge unit 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge unit 752 of the upper stage 71. Here, the lower stage 72 is formed of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game ball that has entered the inside of the guide path 77 can be visually recognized. In this reference embodiment, the discharge unit 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge unit 752 of the upper stage 71, but it does not have to be shared.

Further, the guide path 77 is a rear guide unit 773 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower introduction unit 771 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then drops the ball toward the lower side of the game board 2 to guide the ball. After the game ball guided by the direction guide unit 773 is dropped downward of the game board 2 and guided toward the front of the game board 2, it is discharged from the discharge unit 772 (discharge unit 752) provided in the game area. It is provided with a front guide portion 774 (front guide portion 755) for dropping the ball. In this reference embodiment, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide portion 755 of the upper stage 71. In other words, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 communicates with the right guide portion 754 of the upper stage 71, and the game ball guided in the horizontal right direction by the right guide portion 754 can enter the inside. It has become. In this reference embodiment, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide portion 755 of the upper stage 71, but it may not be shared.
Here, since the discharge unit 772 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route entering the guide path 77 wins the upper operating port 25. It will be easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71.

The rotating member 78 is fixed to a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction and to the horizontal front side (rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71) of the rotating shaft 781. The 1 plate 782, the second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotation shaft 781 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782, and the rotation shaft 781 so as to be substantially parallel to the first plate 782. It is provided with a third plate 784 fixed to the horizontal rear side (the left guide portion 753 side of the upper stage 71).

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781 along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotating shaft 781 and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally to the lower left from the rotating shaft 781. .. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781.
The third plate 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically lower side is fixed to the rotating shaft 781. The third plate 784 includes a permanent magnet 787 fixed to the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction.

The door member 79 is fixed to the rotary shaft 791 rotatably attached to the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the rotary shaft 791 so as to close the inside of the left guide portion 753. It is equipped with a rotating door 792.
The rotary door 792 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically upper side is fixed to the rotary shaft 791. The rotary door 792 includes a permanent magnet 793 fixed to the plate surface on the left side in the horizontal direction.

Hereinafter, a flow of distributing the game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 will be described.
In the state of FIG. 47, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73 can be rolled.
The game ball BA1 reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 through between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and as shown in FIG. 47, the game ball BA1 2 The plate surface of the plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled the plate surface of the second plate 783 in the horizontal right direction collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, FIG. 48 (A) shows a state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and FIG. 48 (B) shows the first plate 782 of the first plate 782. This is the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the plate-shaped portion 785.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781. Therefore, the rotating member 78 is as shown in FIG. 48 (A). It rotates around the rotation axis 781 (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Further, each plate 783, 784 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the game ball BA1 rolls on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 in the horizontal right direction.

FIG. 49 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotating member has rotated.
As shown in FIG. 49, when the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 by colliding the game ball BA1 with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate of the first plate 782 The end surface of the shape portion 785 on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is on the rotating member 78 side. Have in.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, and thus reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement of the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Since this is not the case, the subsequent game ball BA2 cannot be distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 passes through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 to the left guide portion 753. It will be exposed inside the.

Here, as described above, in the upper stage 71, about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed. It is configured to be distributed to the route that falls into the game area.
Further, as described above, in the lower stage 72, about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are played. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.
Hereinafter, the flow of the game balls distributed to each route of the upper stage 71 will be described. The description of the flow of the game balls distributed to each route of the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes entering the guide path.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route for entering the guide path 75 will enter the upper introduction portion 751 along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741. As shown in FIG. 50, the game ball BA1 that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide section 753, and then is guided toward the horizontal left direction. Become. The game ball BA1 guided horizontally to the left by the left guide unit 753 collides with the rotary door 792.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the rotating door. Specifically, FIG. 51 (A) shows a state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the rotary door 792, and FIG. 51 (B) shows a state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the rotary door 792. ..
When the game ball BA1 collides with the rotary door 792, the door member 79 rotates about the rotary shaft 791 as shown in FIG. 51 (A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). When the door member 79 rotates about the rotating shaft 791 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the rotating door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the rotating door 792 passes through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753. It will be close to the permanent magnet 787 of the plate 784.
Here, the permanent magnet 793 of the rotary door 792 is attached to the rotary door 792 so as to repel each other when it approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 as the door member 79 rotates.

Therefore, when the game ball BA1 collides with the rotary door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the rotary door 792 approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the third plate Since the 784 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 by the repulsive force of the permanent magnet 787, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 as shown in FIG. 51 (B) (counterclockwise direction in the drawing). See arrow). Further, each plate 782 and 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the rotating door 792, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. Engage with and stop its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG. 47.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that fall into the game area.
As shown in FIG. 52, the game ball BA1 distributed to the route that falls into the game area falls to the game area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. In this case, since the game ball BA1 does not collide with the rotary door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the rotary door 792 is a permanent magnet of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753. It does not come close to 787, and the rotating member 78 does not rotate.

Here, in a state where the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is , May collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is about 20% of the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. Although it is set to%, it may be set to a different ratio.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so that the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (FIG. See the middle-counterclockwise arrow). Further, each plate 783, 784 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA2 with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 has an end face on the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781. It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG. 47.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 has the guiding means (first plate 782 and the second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to the upper stage 71 and one game ball on the upper stage by the guiding means. It is provided with a blocking means (second plate 783) for preventing the following game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means when the ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the stage 71. ..
According to this, when the blocking means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the guiding means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Since it is prevented from being guided to the upper stage 71, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. .. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

In this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 also serves as a guiding means and a blocking means, but may not serve as a guiding means and a blocking means, and the guiding means and the blocking means may be separate bodies.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the blocking means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the guiding means rolls the subsequent game ball to the upper stage 71. Although it is prevented from being guided to the surface 74, when two or more game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the subsequent game balls are rolled to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. It may be prevented from guiding to the moving surface 74.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the blocking means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the guiding means rolls the subsequent game ball to the upper stage 71. Although it is prevented from being guided to the surface 74, the subsequent game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means based on other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time. You may prevent it from doing so.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 (first stage) and a lower stage 72 (second stage) different from the upper stage 71. The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the following gaming ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.
According to this, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby following by the guiding means. Since it prevents the game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player is prevented from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the blocking means. Even in this case, the subsequent movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 can be enjoyed.

In this reference embodiment, the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, so that the guiding means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Although it is blocked, for example, by guiding the game ball to the game area, it is possible to prevent the following game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. In short, the blocking means need only be able to prevent the subsequent gaming ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, and the stage does not have to include the lower stage 72.

Further, as described above, in the upper stage 71, about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are played. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area. As described above, in the lower stage 72, about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are in the game area. It is configured to be distributed to the falling route. In other words, in the present reference embodiment, the upper stage 71 is an advantageous stage for the player as compared with the lower stage 72.
According to this, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the subsequent game ball, and the upper stage 71 can be rolled. Is an advantageous stage for the player as compared with the lower stage 72, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.

In this reference mode, as described above, the upper stage 71 allocates about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75, and about 60%. The lower stage 72 is configured to distribute the game balls of the above to the route that falls into the game area, and as described above, the lower stage 72 transfers about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the guide path 77. It is configured to distribute to the route to enter and to distribute about 90% of the game balls to the route to fall into the game area, but the distribution rate may be different from this.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, the upper stage 71 is set as a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72, but is set as a stage that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the lower stage 72. It may be set to the same distribution rate as the lower stage 72.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the blocking means is a blocking state (a standing state of the second plate 783) in which the guiding means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and a guiding state. It has a non-blocking state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by means. The two-stage stage 7 is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73 (switching means) for switching the blocking means into either a blocking state or a non-blocking state. When one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state.
According to this, the two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means into either a blocking state or a non-blocking state, and the stage distribution mechanism 73 uses the guiding means to play one game ball. When guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, so that the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when one game ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means may be switched to the blocking state.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the stage distribution mechanism 73 guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, for example. , The blocking means may be switched to the blocking state based on other conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Specifically, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the rotary door 792.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so that the player can use the guiding means. You can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the upper stage 71.

In the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the rotary door 792. For example, the blocking means may be switched to the non-blocking state by using the gaming balls assigned to the routes that fall into the gaming area. In short, the stage distribution mechanism 73 may switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. .. Specifically, in the stage distribution mechanism 73, a subsequent game ball BA2 different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so that the player Can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 contacts the following game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so that the blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state. A second plate-shaped portion 786 (contact means) of 782 is provided. This contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with a part of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Specifically, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the ratio of the game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72. Is set to be about 20%.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Since the contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with a part (about 20%) of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the player Will pay attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the stage distribution mechanism 73, the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the rotary door 792, so that the permanent magnet 793 of the rotary door 792 is directed to the left guide portion 753. The blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state by approaching the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 can surely switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnet 793 and the permanent magnet 787, so that the player can play with confidence. can do.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are in the first guided state (substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71 and only in the lower stage 72. It has a second guiding state (upright state of the second plate 783) for guiding the game ball, and functions as a stage guiding means for guiding the game ball to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72. The stage guiding means includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 (switching means) for switching the stage guiding means to either the first guiding state or the second guiding state.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 include a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 into either the first induction state or the second induction state. Since the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches between the first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71 and the second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72, the player can switch to either the first guidance state. Attention will be paid to the state of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Further, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 switch to the second guided state (first guided state), so that the subsequent game balls are moved to the upper stage 71 (on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783). Since it is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface of the lower stage 72), the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are hindered by the subsequent game balls. The rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) can be rolled without being carried out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flowing down the game area flows is a two-stage stage including an upper stage 71 (first flow path) and a lower stage 72 (second flow path). Although the stage 7 is illustrated and described, it may be applied to other flow paths. For example, the first flow path and the second flow path may be an accessory such as a croon, or may be a flow path leading to a large winning opening, a V winning opening, or the like.

According to this reference form as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) When the blocking means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the guiding means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Since this is prevented, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.
(2) The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, whereby the following game is played by the guiding means. Since the ball is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player is prevented from guiding the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the blocking means. Even if there is, the movement of the subsequent game ball guided by the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 can be enjoyed.

(3) The game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the subsequent game ball, and the upper stage 71 can roll the rolling surface 74. Since the stage is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.
(4) The two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state, and the stage distribution mechanism 73 uses the guiding means to move one game ball to the upper stage. When guided to the rolling surface 74 of 71, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, so that the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) Since the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the player can use the guiding means to switch to the upper stage. You can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by 71.
(6) Since the stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, the blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state, so that the player can switch to the non-blocking state. It is possible to further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

(7) The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with a part (about 20%) of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so that the player can use the player. Attention will be paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(8) The stage distribution mechanism 73 can surely switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnet 793 and the permanent magnet 787, so that the player can play with peace of mind. Can be done.

(9) The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 include a stage distribution mechanism 73 for switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either the first induction state or the second induction state, and stage vibration. Since the minute mechanism 73 switches between the first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71 and the second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72, the player can perform the first. Attention will be paid to the state of the plate 782 and the second plate 783. Further, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 switch to the second guided state (first guided state), so that the subsequent game balls are moved to the upper stage 71 (on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783). Since it is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface of the lower stage 72), the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are hindered by the subsequent game balls. The rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) can be rolled without being carried out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present reference embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75. The state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Assuming that the state is the second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71) in the gaming area are entered into the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). It is possible. Then, the pachinko machine 1 provides a guide means (guide path 75) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives benefits to the player. I have.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that gives benefits to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In this reference mode, the second gaming state gives a profit to the player and is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but is a gaming state that does not give a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that gives the player the same benefits as the first gaming state.

From this point of view, in view of the invention according to the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are the first gaming balls (1st gaming ball) fired by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state. The game ball BA1) functions as a second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through a predetermined area (a region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. ..
Further, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is a second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. Functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state when a specific condition is satisfied (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
Then, the second plate 783 is a second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state. It functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the gaming state of 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75 gives a profit to the player. Since the gaming ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 has a second plate 783 on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Since the generation of the gaming state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. The other region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) is passed through.

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the second game is performed on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of conditions.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a restricted state (a standing state of the second plate 783) that limits the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. ), And a non-restricted state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Then, when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state is generated on the second plate-shaped portion 786, the first gaming state is not limited. Switching to the state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the first gaming is performed in the second plate-shaped portion 786. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the generation of the second gaming state during the occurrence of the first gaming state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 is limited to only a part of the second game balls that satisfy the predetermined conditions (the game ball BA2 that collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786). Based on this, a specific condition is satisfied.

According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 satisfies a specific condition based on only a part of the second game balls satisfying the predetermined condition, so that the player can use the second game ball. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball of 2 satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state.

According to this, since the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second gaming state, the first plate 782 And the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate The 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Further, for example, whether or not a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and a second game state is generated when the game ball is detected by this sensor. When the lottery is executed and the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the gaming ball existing in the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided, or it may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the game ball BA1 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state is a predetermined region in the gaming region (first plate 782 and second plate). If you win the state-generating lottery executed based on passing through the area between 783 and the area between nails NL1 and nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37), the second When a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Will not be generated, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state.

According to this, since the second plate-shaped portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first gaming state, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the second plate-shaped portion 786. The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaced the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting the game ball is attached to the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor is attached. When the game ball is detected in, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and the game is played with this sensor. When a ball is detected, a lottery for whether or not to generate a first gaming state is executed, and when this lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to perform the first gaming state. May be generated. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first gaming state is not won, it is formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The game ball existing in the area of the gap may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the game ball BA2 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the second gaming state is in a predetermined region in the gaming region (rolling of the lower stage 72). The area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.) If the state-generating lottery executed based on passing is won, the first gaming state may be generated, and if the state-generating lottery is not won, the first gaming state may not be generated. ..
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the first game state generating means may be the case where a specific condition is satisfied when the state generation lottery is won, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, a specific condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time has passed, or may be satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large winning opening, a V winning opening, or the like. ..

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 were flow paths leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching the flow paths of the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, the flow path leading to the large winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operating port, the flow path leading to the through gate, and the like may be switched. The flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings may be switched, or the flow path leading to the upper operating port and the flow path leading to the lower operating port may be switched. It may be configured to switch. Further, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, and may be, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. (Region of) and functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding to another region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782). To do.

According to this, since the second plate 783 guides to another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. it can.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a game ball guidance state (first) in which the second game ball is guided to a region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. The upright state of the 2 plate 783) and the non-guided state of the game ball that guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783). Have. Then, when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state, the game ball guidance state is switched to, and when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state. The game ball is switched to the non-guided state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the game ball guided state when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the first plate-shaped portion 786 is the first. Since the game ball is switched to the non-induced state when the game state of is generated, it is restricted to generate the second game state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is generated. Without this, it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

In the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is adopted as the game ball guiding means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside a large winning opening or inside an accessory.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is predetermined in the game area. A second gaming state generating means that generates a second gaming state based on passing through a region (the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and abutting and displacementing the first gaming ball. Is functioning as.
Further, in the stage distribution mechanism 73, the second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is a predetermined area in the game area. (A region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782), and abutting against and displaces the second game ball. Based on this, it functions as a first gaming state generating means for generating a first gaming state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 enter the first game ball that generated the second gaming state into the player for the first benefit (about 40% of the game balls enter the guideway 75). The stage distribution mechanism 73 guides the player to the first profit-giving area (upper stage 71) that grants the route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73 gives the player the first game ball that generated the first game state. It is guided to the second profit-giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guideway 77) different from the profit.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second gaming state to the upper stage 71 that gives the player a first profit, and the stage swings. Since the minute mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, the player can play the game ball. We will pay attention to the destination of.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751). The second game ball that has entered the first profit entry area (upper stage introduction section 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 is the first. When the second condition (entry into the lower introduction section 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball is entered into the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) to which the second profit is given.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball, which has entered the 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, gives a second profit when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower stage introduction unit 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are in both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from the above.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the regions of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area, the player pays attention to whether or not the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71 is a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 when the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751) is satisfied. Functions as a first profit-giving area for entering the first profit-entry area (upper-stage introduction section 751) for giving the first profit, and the lower stage 72 sets the second condition (to the lower-stage introduction section 771). When the ball entry) is satisfied, the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that gives a second profit. It was functioning as a second profit-giving area to make the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit-giving area and the second profit-giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, or the like, and may be any area as long as it can give a profit to the player. .. Further, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, the inside of the grand prize opening or the inside of the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

[Reference form E]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment E of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment E of the present invention.
In the reference embodiment D, the center frame 37 includes a two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the symbol display device 36.
On the other hand, in the present reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7E provided in the lower region of the symbol display device 36, which is different from the reference embodiment D. different.

The two-stage stage 7E flows down the game area with the upper stage 71E arranged on the vertically upper side (display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and the lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71E. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73E that distributes the game ball to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72.

FIG. 54 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 55 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the upper stage 71E directs the rolling surface 74 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area and the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. It is provided with a guide path 75E that guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in FIG. 53), and the upper stage is reached by the stage distribution mechanism 73E. By being distributed to 71E, it reaches the rolling surface 74.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed so as to be gently curved so as to rise toward both the horizontal left and right sides, with the vertically upper position of the upper operating port 25 as the lowest position. The rolling surface 74 is located above the upper operating port 25 and is located adjacent to the concave portion 741 which is gently depressed and the concave portion 741 on both the left and right sides of the concave portion 741 and is gently depressed. It has a concave portion 742.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that inclines so as to descend toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75E.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to descend toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball moves back and forth in the horizontal and horizontal directions to roll the rolling surface 74, and then travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 to enter the guide path 75E, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that falls into the game area along the route. Specifically, the upper stage 71E is about among the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 by setting the tilt angle of the rolling surface 74, the tilt angle of the concave portion 741 and each concave portion 742, and the like. It is configured so that 40% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guide path 75E, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the route falling into the game area.

The guide path 75E has an upper introduction section 751 capable of inserting a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 into the inside, and a discharge section 752 for discharging the game ball entered from the upper introduction section 751 into the game area and dropping the ball. And have. Here, the upper stage 71 is formed of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game ball that has entered the inside of the guide path 75E can be visually recognized.

Further, the guide path 75E is a left guide portion 753E and a left guide portion 753E that guide the game ball that has entered the upper introduction portion 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guide the game ball in the horizontal left direction. After the game ball guided in the horizontal left direction is dropped toward the lower side of the game board 2 to be guided, the right guide portion 754 and the right guide portion 754 guide the game ball in the horizontal right direction in the horizontal right direction. It is provided with a front guide portion 755 for guiding the game ball guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharging the game ball from the discharge portion 752 provided in the game area to drop the game ball.
Here, since the discharge unit 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route entering the guide path 75E wins the upper operating port 25. It will be easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73E includes a rotating member 78E provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E.

The rotating member 78E is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction and the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71E). The 1 plate 782, the second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotation shaft 781 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782, and the rotation shaft 781 so as to be substantially parallel to the first plate 782. It is provided with a third plate 784E fixed to the horizontal rear side (the left guide portion 753E side of the upper stage 71E).

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781 along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotating shaft 781 and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally to the lower left from the rotating shaft 781. .. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781.
The third plate 784E is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically lower side is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. The third plate 784E includes a protruding portion 788E formed on the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction. The protruding portion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical columnar shape whose major axis direction is the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E.

Hereinafter, a flow of distributing the game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E will be described.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in FIG. 53), and as shown in FIG. 2 The plate surface of the plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled the plate surface of the second plate 783 in the horizontal right direction collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, FIG. 56 (A) shows a state immediately before the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and FIG. 56 (B) shows the first plate of the first plate 782. This is the state immediately after the game ball collides with the shape portion 785.
When the game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so that the rotating member 78E rotates as shown in FIG. 56 (A). It rotates about the axis 781 (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Further, each plate 783, 784E rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
After that, as shown in FIG. 56B, the game ball rolls on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 in the horizontal right direction.

FIG. 57 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotating member has rotated.
As shown in FIG. 57, when the rotating member 78E is rotated about the rotation shaft 781 by the game ball colliding with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E has the first plate shape of the first plate 782. The end surface of the portion 785 on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E on the rotating member 78E side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is on the rotating member 78E side. Have in.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71E.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, and thus reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 by the engagement of the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Since this is not the case, the subsequent game ball BA2 cannot be distributed to the upper stage 71E. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784E is close to the left guide portion 753E of the guide path 75E, and the protruding portion 788E of the third plate 784E is an opening 756E formed in the left guide portion 753E (see FIGS. 54 and 55). ) Will be exposed inside the left guide portion 753E.

Here, as described above, in the upper stage 71E, about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 75E, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed. It is configured to be distributed to the route that falls into the game area.
Further, as described above, in the lower stage 72, about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are played. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.
Hereinafter, the flow of the game balls distributed to each route of the upper stage 71E will be described. The description of the flow of the game balls distributed to each route of the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes entering the guide path.
The game ball BA1 distributed to the route for entering the guide path 75E will enter the upper introduction portion 751 along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741. As shown in FIG. 58, the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide section 753E, and then is guided toward the horizontal left direction. .. The game ball BA1 guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753E collides with the protruding portion 788E.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the protruding portion. Specifically, FIG. 59 (A) shows a state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the projecting portion 788E, and FIG. 59 (B) shows a state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the projecting portion 788E. Is.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the projecting portion 788E, the projecting portion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical columnar direction in which the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E is the major axis direction, so that the third plate 784E is formed. , The game ball BA1 will be flipped up vertically. As a result, the third plate 784E rotates about the rotating shaft 781, so that the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) (FIG. 59 (B) Refer to the counterclockwise arrow in the middle). Further, each plate 782 and 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the protruding portion 788E, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the rolling surface of the lower stage 72. It engages with 76 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78E returns to the state shown in FIG. 55.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing game balls allocated to routes that fall into the game area.
As shown in FIG. 60, the game ball BA1 assigned to the route of falling into the game area falls to the game area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. In this case, since the game ball BA1 does not collide with the protruding portion 788E, the rotating member 78E does not rotate.

Here, in a state where the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the first. It may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is about 20% of the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. Although it is set to%, it may be set to a different ratio.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so that the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (FIG. See the middle-counterclockwise arrow). Further, each plate 783, 784E rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA2 with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E has an end surface on the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781. It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78E returns to the state shown in FIG. 55.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73E moves the third plate 784E vertically upward by colliding the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means with the protruding portion 788E. It is flipped up and the blocking means is switched to the non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protruding portion 788E, so that the player can adjust the probability of switching to the non-blocking state. Attention will be paid to whether or not the plate 784E is flipped up vertically. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this reference form as described above, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (7) and (9) in the reference form D, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(10) The stage distribution mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protruding portion 788E, so that the player can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state. It will be noticed whether or not is flipped up vertically. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present reference embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75E. The state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E. Assuming that the state is the second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71E) in the gaming area are entered into the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). It is possible. Then, the pachinko machine 1 provides a guide means (guide path 75E) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives benefits to the player. I have.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that gives benefits to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In this reference mode, the second gaming state gives a profit to the player and is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but is a gaming state that does not give a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that gives the player the same benefits as the first gaming state.

From this point of view, in view of the invention according to the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are the first gaming balls (1st gaming ball) fired by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state. The game ball BA1) functions as a second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through a predetermined area (a region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. ..
Further, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is a second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. Functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state when a specific condition is satisfied (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
Then, the second plate 783 is a second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state. It functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the gaming state of 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75E gives a profit to the player. Since the gaming ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 has a second plate 783 on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Since the generation of the gaming state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. The other region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) is passed through.

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the second game is performed on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of conditions.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a restricted state (a standing state of the second plate 783) that limits the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. ), And a non-restricted state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Then, when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state is generated on the second plate-shaped portion 786, the first gaming state is not limited. Switching to the state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the first gaming is performed in the second plate-shaped portion 786. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the generation of the second gaming state during the occurrence of the first gaming state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 is limited to only a part of the second game balls that satisfy the predetermined conditions (the game ball BA2 that collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786). Based on this, a specific condition is satisfied.

According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 satisfies a specific condition based on only a part of the second game balls satisfying the predetermined condition, so that the player can use the second game ball. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball of 2 satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state.

According to this, since the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second gaming state, the first plate 782 And the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate The 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Further, for example, whether or not a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and a second game state is generated when the game ball is detected by this sensor. When the lottery is executed and the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the gaming ball existing in the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided, or it may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the game ball BA1 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state is a predetermined region in the gaming region (first plate 782 and second plate). If you win the state-generating lottery executed based on passing through the area between 783 and the area between nails NL1 and nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37), the second When a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Will not be generated, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state.

According to this, since the second plate-shaped portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first gaming state, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the second plate-shaped portion 786. The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaced the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting the game ball is attached to the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor is attached. When the game ball is detected in, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and the game is played with this sensor. When a ball is detected, a lottery for whether or not to generate a first gaming state is executed, and when this lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to perform the first gaming state. May be generated. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first gaming state is not won, it is formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The game ball existing in the area of the gap may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the game ball BA2 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the second gaming state is in a predetermined region in the gaming region (rolling of the lower stage 72). The area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.) If the state-generating lottery executed based on passing is won, the first gaming state may be generated, and if the state-generating lottery is not won, the first gaming state may not be generated. ..
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the first game state generating means may be the case where a specific condition is satisfied when the state generation lottery is won, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, a specific condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time has passed, or may be satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large winning opening, a V winning opening, or the like. ..

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72 were flow paths leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching the flow paths of the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, the flow path leading to the large winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operating port, the flow path leading to the through gate, and the like may be switched. The flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings may be switched, or the flow path leading to the upper operating port and the flow path leading to the lower operating port may be switched. It may be configured to switch. Further, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, and may be, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. (Region of) and functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding to another region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782). To do.

According to this, since the second plate 783 guides to another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. it can.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a game ball guidance state (first) in which the second game ball is guided to a region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. The upright state of the 2 plate 783) and the non-guided state of the game ball that guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783). Have. Then, when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state, the game ball guidance state is switched to, and when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state. The game ball is switched to the non-guided state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the game ball guided state when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the first plate-shaped portion 786 is the first. Since the game ball is switched to the non-induced state when the game state of is generated, it is restricted to generate the second game state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is generated. Without this, it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

In the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is adopted as the game ball guiding means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside a large winning opening or inside an accessory.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is predetermined in the game area. A second gaming state generating means that generates a second gaming state based on passing through a region (the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and abutting and displacementing the first gaming ball. Is functioning as.
Further, in the stage distribution mechanism 73E, the second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is a predetermined area in the game area. (A region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782), and is displaced in contact with the second game ball. Based on this, it functions as a first gaming state generating means for generating a first gaming state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 enter the first game ball that generated the second gaming state into the player for the first benefit (about 40% of the game balls enter the guide path 75E). The stage distribution mechanism 73E guides the player to the first profit-giving area (upper stage 71E) that grants (distributes to the route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73E gives the player the first game ball that generated the first game state. It is guided to the second profit-giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guideway 77) different from the profit.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second gaming state to the upper stage 71E that gives the player the first profit, and the stage swing. Since the minute mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, the player can play the game ball. We will pay attention to the destination of.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751). The second game ball that has entered the first profit entry area (upper stage introduction section 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E is the first. When the second condition (entry into the lower introduction section 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball is entered into the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) to which the second profit is given.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that has entered the 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E gives a second profit when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower stage introduction unit 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are in both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from the above.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the regions of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area, the player pays attention to whether or not the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71E is a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 when the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751) is satisfied. Functions as a first profit-giving area for entering the first profit-entry area (upper-stage introduction section 751) for giving the first profit, and the lower stage 72 sets the second condition (to the lower-stage introduction section 771). When the ball entry) is satisfied, the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that gives a second profit. It was functioning as a second profit-giving area to make the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit-giving area and the second profit-giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, or the like, and may be any area as long as it can give a profit to the player. .. Further, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, the inside of the grand prize opening or the inside of the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

[Reference form F]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment F of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment F of the present invention.
In the reference embodiment D, the center frame 37 includes a two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the symbol display device 36.
On the other hand, in the present reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7F provided in the lower region of the symbol display device 36, which is different from the reference embodiment D. different.

The two-stage stage 7F flows down the game area with the upper stage 71F arranged on the vertically upper side (display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and the lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71F. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73F that distributes game balls to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

FIG. 62 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 63 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the upper stage 71F directs the rolling surface 74 that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area and the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. It is provided with a guide path 75F that guides the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in FIG. 61), and the upper stage is reached by the stage distribution mechanism 73F. By being distributed to 71F, it reaches the rolling surface 74.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed so as to be gently curved so as to rise toward both the horizontal left and right sides, with the vertically upper position of the upper operating port 25 as the lowest position. The rolling surface 74 is located above the upper operating port 25 and is located adjacent to the concave portion 741 which is gently depressed and the concave portion 741 on both the left and right sides of the concave portion 741 and is gently depressed. It has a concave portion 742.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that inclines so as to descend toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75F.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that is inclined so as to descend toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the game area.
Therefore, the game ball moves back and forth in the horizontal and horizontal directions to roll the rolling surface 74, and then travels along the inclined surface of the concave portion 741 to enter the guide path 75F, and the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. It will be discharged to the game area through one of the routes that falls into the game area along the route. Specifically, the upper stage 71F is about, among the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74, by setting the tilt angle of the rolling surface 74, the tilt angle of the concave portion 741 and each concave portion 742, and the like. It is configured so that 40% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guide path 75F, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the route falling into the game area.

The guide path 75F has an upper introduction section 751 capable of inserting a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 74 into the inside, and a discharge section 752 for ejecting the game ball entered from the upper introduction section 751 into the game area and dropping the ball. And have. Here, the upper stage 71F is formed of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that the game ball that has entered the inside of the guide path 75F can be visually recognized.

Further, the guide path 75F is a left guide section 753F and a left guide section 753F that guide the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guide the game ball in the horizontal left direction. After the game ball guided in the horizontal left direction is dropped toward the lower side of the game board 2 to be guided, the right guide portion 754 and the right guide portion 754 guide the game ball in the horizontal right direction in the horizontal right direction. It is provided with a front guide portion 755 for guiding the game ball guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharging the game ball from the discharge portion 752 provided in the game area to drop the game ball.
Here, since the discharge unit 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the game area through the route entering the guide path 75F wins the upper operating port 25. It will be easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73F includes a rotating member 78F provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78F is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction and the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F). It includes one plate 782 and a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotation shaft 781F so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781F along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotating shaft 781F, and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally to the lower left from the rotating shaft 781F. .. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.

Hereinafter, the flow of distributing the game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F will be described.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in FIG. 61), and as shown in FIG. 2 The plate surface of the plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled the plate surface of the second plate 783 in the horizontal right direction collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 64 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotating member has rotated.
As shown in FIG. 64, when the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotation shaft 781F by the game ball colliding with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F has the first plate shape of the first plate 782. The end surface of the portion 785 on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 781F and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78F side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is on the rotating member 78F side. Have in.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that it reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the engagement of the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Since this is not the case, the subsequent game ball BA2 cannot be distributed to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.

Then, as described above, the upper stage 71F distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75F, and plays about 60% of the game balls. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.
As described above, in the lower stage 72, about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are played. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the game ball distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the first plate 782. It may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is about 20% of the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. Although it is set to%, it may be set to a different ratio.

When the game ball collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781F, so that the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotation shaft 781F (in the figure). See counterclockwise arrow). Further, the plate 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781F.
When the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the collision of the game ball with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the lower stage. It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78F returns to the state shown in FIG. 63.

According to this reference form as described above, the same actions and effects as those of (1) to (4), (6), (7), and (9) in the reference form D can be obtained.

Here, in the present reference embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75F. The state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F. Assuming that the state is the second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71F) in the gaming area are entered into the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). It is possible. Then, the pachinko machine 1 provides a guide means (guide path 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives benefits to the player. I have.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that gives benefits to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In this reference mode, the second gaming state gives a profit to the player and is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but is a gaming state that does not give a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that gives the player the same benefits as the first gaming state.

From this point of view, in view of the invention according to the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are the first gaming balls (1st gaming ball) fired by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state. The game ball BA1) functions as a second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through a predetermined area (a region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. ..
Further, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is a second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. Functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state when a specific condition is satisfied (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
Then, the second plate 783 is a second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state. It functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the gaming state of 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F gives the player a profit. Since the gaming ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 has a second plate 783 on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Since the generation of the gaming state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. The other region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) is passed through.

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the second game is performed on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of conditions.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a restricted state (a standing state of the second plate 783) that limits the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. ), And a non-restricted state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Then, when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state is generated on the second plate-shaped portion 786, the first gaming state is not limited. Switching to the state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the first gaming is performed in the second plate-shaped portion 786. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 do not restrict the generation of the second gaming state during the occurrence of the first gaming state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 is limited to only a part of the second game balls that satisfy the predetermined conditions (the game ball BA2 that collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786). Based on this, a specific condition is satisfied.

According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 satisfies a specific condition based on only a part of the second game balls satisfying the predetermined condition, so that the player can use the second game ball. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball of 2 satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state.

According to this, since the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second gaming state, the first plate 782 And the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782 and the second plate The 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Further, for example, whether or not a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and a second game state is generated when the game ball is detected by this sensor. When the lottery is executed and the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the gaming ball existing in the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided, or it may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the game ball BA1 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state is a predetermined region in the gaming region (first plate 782 and second plate). If you win the state-generating lottery executed based on passing through the area between 783 and the area between nails NL1 and nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37), the second When a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Will not be generated, so that the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state.

According to this, since the second plate-shaped portion 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first gaming state, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the second plate-shaped portion 786. The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaced the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting the game ball is attached to the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor is attached. When the game ball is detected in, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Further, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and the game is played with this sensor. When a ball is detected, a lottery for whether or not to generate a first gaming state is executed, and when this lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to perform the first gaming state. May be generated. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first gaming state is not won, it is formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The game ball existing in the area of the gap may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the game ball BA2 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the second gaming state is in a predetermined region in the gaming region (rolling of the lower stage 72). The area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37, etc.) If the state-generating lottery executed based on passing is won, the first gaming state may be generated, and if the state-generating lottery is not won, the first gaming state may not be generated. ..
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Therefore, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the first game state generating means may be the case where a specific condition is satisfied when the state generation lottery is won, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, a specific condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time has passed, or may be satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large winning opening, a V winning opening, or the like. ..

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 were flow paths leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching the flow paths of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, the flow path leading to the large winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operating port, the flow path leading to the through gate, and the like may be switched. The flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings may be switched, or the flow path leading to the upper operating port and the flow path leading to the lower operating port may be switched. It may be configured to switch. Further, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, and may be, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. (Region of) and functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding to another region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782). To do.

According to this, since the second plate 783 guides to another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. it can.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a game ball guidance state (first) in which the second game ball is guided to a region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. The upright state of the 2 plate 783) and the non-guided state of the game ball that guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783). Have. Then, when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state, the game ball guidance state is switched to, and when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state. The game ball is switched to the non-guided state.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the game ball guided state when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the first plate-shaped portion 786 is the first. Since the game ball is switched to the non-induced state when the game state of is generated, it is restricted to generate the second game state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is generated. Without this, it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

In the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is adopted as the game ball guiding means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside a large winning opening or inside an accessory.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is predetermined in the game area. A second gaming state generating means that generates a second gaming state based on passing through a region (the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and abutting and displacementing the first gaming ball. Is functioning as.
Further, in the stage distribution mechanism 73F, the second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is a predetermined area in the game area. (A region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782), and abutting against and displaces the second game ball. Based on this, it functions as a first gaming state generating means for generating a first gaming state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 enter the first game ball that generated the second game state into the player for the first profit (about 40% of the game ball enters the guide path 75F). The stage distribution mechanism 73F guides the player to the first profit-giving area (upper stage 71F) that grants (distributes to the route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73F gives the player the first game ball that generated the first game state. It is guided to the second profit-giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guideway 77) different from the profit.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second gaming state to the upper stage 71F that gives the player the first profit, and shakes the stage. Since the minute mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, the player can play the game ball. We will pay attention to the destination of.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751). The second game ball that has entered the first profit entry area (upper stage introduction section 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F is the first. When the second condition (entry into the lower introduction section 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball is entered into the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) to which the second profit is given.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball, which has entered the 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F, gives a second profit when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower stage introduction unit 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are in both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from the above.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the regions of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area, the player pays attention to whether or not the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71F is a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 when the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751) is satisfied. Functions as a first profit-giving area for entering the first profit-entry area (upper-stage introduction section 751) for giving the first profit, and the lower stage 72 sets the second condition (to the lower-stage introduction section 771). When the ball entry) is satisfied, the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that gives a second profit. It was functioning as a second profit-giving area to make the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit-giving area and the second profit-giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, or the like, and may be any area as long as it can give a profit to the player. .. Further, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, the inside of the grand prize opening or the inside of the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

[Reference form G]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment G of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board according to the reference embodiment G of the present invention.
In the reference form F, the center frame 37 includes a two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the symbol display device 36.
On the other hand, in the present reference embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7G provided in the area below the symbol display device 36, which is different from the reference embodiment D. different.

The two-stage stage 7G flows down the game area with the upper stage 71F arranged on the vertically upper side (display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and the lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71F. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73G that distributes the game ball to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

FIG. 66 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 67 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a rotating member 78G provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78G is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction and the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F). The 1 plate 782G, the second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782G, and the rotating shaft 781F so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782G. It is fixed to the horizontal front side and has a fourth plate 789G fixed to the opposite side of the second plate 783 with the rotation shaft 781F interposed therebetween.

The first plate 782G is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781F along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782G includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781F. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.
The fourth plate 789G is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the left side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F.

Hereinafter, a flow of distributing the game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G will be described.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G (see arrow A in FIG. 65), and as shown in FIG. 2 The plate surface of the plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled the plate surface of the second plate 783 in the horizontal right direction collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotating member has rotated.
As shown in FIG. 68, when the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotation shaft 781F by the game ball colliding with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, the rotating member 78G has the first plate shape of the first plate 782G. The end surface of the portion 785 opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78G side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is on the rotating member 78G side. Have in.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G faces the horizontal right direction. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, and thus reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the engagement of the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Since this is not the case, the subsequent game ball BA2 cannot be distributed to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F.

Then, as described above, the upper stage 71F distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75F, and plays about 60% of the game balls. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.
As described above, in the lower stage 72, about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are played. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the fourth plate 789G is in a state of protruding vertically downward, so that the lower stage 72 The game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 and the rotating shaft 781F will collide with the fourth plate 789G.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G, the fourth plate 789G rotates about the rotating shaft 781F, so that the rotating member 78G disengages the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. It rotates around the rotation shaft 781F in the direction (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). Further, the plate 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781F.
When the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the collision of the game ball with the fourth plate 789G, the end surface of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. Engage with and stop its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78G returns to the state shown in FIG. 67.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73G switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by coming into contact with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means. It is equipped with 4 plates 789G (contact means). This contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means. Since the contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, the player can use the guidance means. You can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.

According to this reference form as described above, the same actions / effects as (1) to (4), (6), and (9) in the reference form D can be obtained, and the following actions / effects can be obtained. be able to.
(11) The stage distribution mechanism 73G includes contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, and the contact means. Is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, so that the player can use the guiding means to perform the upper stage. You can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the 71st floor with peace of mind.

Here, in the present reference embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction portion 751 of the guide path 75F. The state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the game ball exists on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F. Assuming that the state is the second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area (upper stage 71F) in the gaming area are entered into the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). It is possible. Then, the pachinko machine 1 provides a guide means (guide path 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives benefits to the player. I have.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that gives benefits to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In this reference mode, the second gaming state gives a profit to the player and is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but is a gaming state that does not give a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that gives the player the same benefits as the first gaming state.

From this point of view, in view of the invention according to the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are the first game balls (1st game ball) fired by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state. The game ball BA1) functions as a second game state generating means for generating a second game state based on passing through a predetermined area (a region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area. ..
Further, in the fourth plate 789G, the second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition. In this case (when the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G), it functions as a first game state generating means for generating a first game state.
Then, the second plate 783 is a second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state. It functions as a limiting means for limiting the generation of the gaming state of 2.

According to this, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the game balls existing in the specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F gives the player a profit. Since the gaming ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 is a second plate 783 on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Since the generation of the gaming state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. The region (region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F) different from the region (region of) is passed.

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the second game is performed on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of conditions.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a restricted state (a standing state of the second plate 783) that limits the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783. ), And an unrestricted state (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783. Then, when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state is generated on the fourth plate 789G, the non-restricted state is set. I'm switching.

According to this, the second plate 783 is switched to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and the first gaming state is changed on the fourth plate 789G. Since it switches to the non-restricted state when it is generated, the second game state is not restricted to be generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the first game state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state.

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second gaming state, so that the first plate 782G And the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA1 to generate the second gaming state. In other words, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first plate 782G and the second plate The 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Further, for example, whether or not a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and a second game state is generated when the game ball is detected by this sensor. When the lottery is executed and the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the gaming ball existing in the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 is moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided, or it may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the game ball BA1 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first gaming state is a predetermined region in the gaming region (first plate 782G and second plate). If you win the state-generating lottery executed based on passing through the area between 783 and the area between nails NL1 and nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37), the second When a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and the second gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. Will not be generated, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the fourth plate 789G causes the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 to be displaced by the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state.

According to this, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first gaming state, so that the configuration of the fourth plate 789G is simplified. can do.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the fourth plate 789G causes the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 to be displaced by the game ball BA2 to generate the first gaming state. In other words, the fourth plate 789G displaced the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the fourth plate 789G may be displaced by a driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, when a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F, and the game ball is detected by this sensor. The first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first gaming state. Further, for example, when a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a region of a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F, and the game ball is detected by this sensor, the first A lottery for whether or not to generate the gaming state of 1 may be executed, and when the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first gaming state. At this time, if the lottery for whether or not to generate the first gaming state is not won, it exists in the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F. The game ball may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

As described above, in the fourth plate 789G, the game ball BA2 launched by the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the second gaming state is in a predetermined region in the gaming region (the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F). When the state occurrence lottery executed based on passing through the area of the gap formed between the two and the area between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37) is won. In addition, if the first gaming state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the first gaming state may not be generated.
According to this, the fourth plate 789G generates the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. The player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the first game state generating means may be the case where a specific condition is satisfied when the state generation lottery is won, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, a specific condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time has passed, or may be satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large winning opening, a V winning opening, or the like. ..

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 were flow paths leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching the flow paths of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, the flow path leading to the large winning opening, the flow path leading to the V winning opening, the flow path leading to the general winning opening, the flow path leading to each operating port, the flow path leading to the through gate, and the like may be switched. The flow path leading to the two types of V winning openings may be switched, or the flow path leading to the upper operating port and the flow path leading to the lower operating port may be switched. It may be configured to switch. Further, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, and may be, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 puts the second game ball (game ball BA2) between the predetermined areas (between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. It functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding to another region (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F) different from the region of).

According to this, since the second plate 783 guides to another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. it can.

Specifically, in the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is a game ball guidance state (first) in which the second game ball is guided to a region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. The upright state of the 2 plate 783) and the non-guided state of the game ball that guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783). Have. Then, when the second game state is generated on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the game ball is switched to the game ball guidance state, and when the first game state is generated on the fourth plate 789G, the game ball. Switching to the non-induction state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the game ball guided state when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and the first game is played on the fourth plate 789G. Since the game ball is switched to the non-induced state when the state is generated, there is no restriction on generating the second game state on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the first game state is generated. , It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the second gaming state is occurring.

In the present reference embodiment, the second plate 783 is adopted as the game ball guiding means, but the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Anything can be used as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve for switching the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, inside a large winning opening or inside an accessory.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the first game ball (game ball BA1) fired by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is predetermined in the game area. A second gaming state generating means that generates a second gaming state based on passing through a region (the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) and abutting and displacementing the first gaming ball. Is functioning as.
Further, in the stage distribution mechanism 73G, the second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is a predetermined area in the game area. The first gaming state is based on passing through (the region of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F) and abutting against and displaces the second gaming ball. It functions as a first game state generating means for generating the above.
Then, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 enter the first game ball that generated the second gaming state into the player for the first benefit (about 40% of the game balls enter the guideway 75F). The stage distribution mechanism 73G guides the player to the first profit-giving area (upper stage 71F) that grants (distributes to the route), and the stage distribution mechanism 73G gives the player the first game ball that generated the first game state. It is guided to the second profit-giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit (about 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route entering the guideway 77) different from the profit.

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that generated the second gaming state to the upper stage 71F that gives the player the first profit, and the stage swings. Since the minute mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, the player can play the game ball. We will pay attention to the destination of.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751). The second game ball that has entered the first profit entry area (upper stage introduction section 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G is the first. When the second condition (entry into the lower introduction section 771) different from the condition is satisfied, the ball is entered into the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) to which the second profit is given.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that has entered the 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G gives a second profit when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. Since the ball enters the lower stage introduction unit 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are in both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (game area) different from the above.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the regions of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area, the player pays attention to whether or not the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area.

Further, in the present reference embodiment, a state in which the game ball can flow down on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is set as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is set. The state in which the game ball exists, in other words, the state in which the game ball can flow down to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71F is a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 when the first condition (entry into the upper introduction portion 751) is satisfied. Functions as a first profit-giving area for entering the first profit-entry area (upper-stage introduction section 751) for giving the first profit, and the lower stage 72 sets the second condition (to the lower-stage introduction section 771). When the ball entry) is satisfied, the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that gives a second profit. It was functioning as a second profit-giving area to make the ball.
On the other hand, the first profit-giving area and the second profit-giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, or the like, and may be any area as long as it can give a profit to the player. .. Further, these areas may be located in any part of the game machine, for example, the inside of the grand prize opening or the inside of the accessory. Further, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state, and for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) is set as the first gaming state and is specified. The control state (open / close execution mode) may be set as the second gaming state.

[Reference form H]
Hereinafter, the reference embodiment H of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the reference embodiment H of the present invention.
In the reference embodiment D, the stage distribution mechanism 73 comprises a rotating member 78 provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71. I was prepared.
On the other hand, in the present reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73H includes a rotating member 78, a door member 79, and an obstructing means 70 that prevents the game ball from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H. It differs from the reference form D in that it.

The obstruction means 70 includes an obstruction plate 701 provided at the upper left position of the rotation shaft 781 of the rotating member 78, an obstruction plate driving unit 702 for driving the obstruction plate 701, and a rotation detection sensor 703 for detecting the rotational state of the rotating member 78. And have.

The baffle plate 701 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. The obstruction plate 701 moves forward toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby hindering the game ball from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H, and toward the inside of the game board 2. By retreating and being buried in the game board 2, it has an unobstructed state that does not interfere with the arrival of the game ball at the stage distribution mechanism 73H.
Further, the baffle plate 701 is connected to the baffle plate drive unit 702 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. The baffle plate 701 is set to either an obstructive state or a non-obstructive state by being driven by the baffle plate driving unit 702.

The rotation detection sensor 703 is attached to the horizontal rear side of the rotation shaft 781 (the left guide portion 753 side of the upper stage 71). The rotation detection sensor 703 detects two rotation states, an upright state of the second plate 783 and a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device>
FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 70, the voice emission control device 5H includes a voice emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the voice emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54.

The MPU 52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotation member 78. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, a speaker unit 125, and a display control device 6. Further, the output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the baffle plate drive unit 702 that causes the baffle plate 701 to perform a recessing operation.
The voice emission control board 51 has a driver circuit. The MPU 52 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to sink the baffle plate 701.

Hereinafter, a flow of distributing the game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73H will be described.
The MPU 52 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) detects two rotational states of the second plate 783 in an upright state and a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783 by the rotation detection sensor 703.

In the state of FIG. 69, since the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H can be rolled.
When the MPU 52 detects the rotational state of the second plate 783 in a substantially horizontal state, it executes the drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to set the baffle plate 701 in the non-obstructive state. In FIG. 69, the obstruction plate 701 is shown in white to show the non-obstruction state.
Since the obstruction plate 701 is set to the unobstructed state, the game ball BA1 reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H through between the nail NL1 and the nail NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 ( (See arrow A in FIG. 45), as shown in FIG. 69, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is rolled in the horizontal right direction.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled the plate surface of the second plate 783 in the horizontal right direction collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotating member has rotated.
As shown in FIG. 71, when the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 by colliding the game ball BA1 with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate of the first plate 782 The end surface of the shape portion 785 on the opposite side of the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is on the rotating member 78 side. Have in.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 passes through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753 to the left guide portion 753. It will be exposed inside the.

Here, as described above, in the upper stage 71, about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed. It is configured to be distributed to the route that falls into the game area.
Further, as described above, in the lower stage 72, about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77, and about 90% of the game balls are played. It is configured to be distributed to routes that fall into the area.
Hereinafter, the flow of the game balls allocated to the routes falling into the game area of the upper stage 71 will be described. The flow of the game balls distributed to the routes entering the guide path 75 of the upper stage 71 and the flow of the game balls distributed to each route of the lower stage 72 are the same as those in the reference mode D.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing game balls distributed to routes that fall into the game area.
As shown in FIG. 72, the game ball BA1 assigned to the route of falling into the game area falls to the game area along the inclined surface of the concave portion 742. In this case, since the game ball BA1 does not collide with the rotary door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the rotary door 792 is a permanent magnet of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753. It does not come close to 787, and the rotating member 78 does not rotate.

When the MPU 52 detects the rotational state of the second plate 783 in the upright state, it executes the drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 and repeats the baffle plate 701 in the unobstructed state and the disturbed state at a predetermined cycle. Set. In addition, in FIG. 71, the disturbing state is shown by showing the disturbing plate 701 with diagonal lines, and in FIG. 72, the disturbing state is shown by showing the disturbing plate 701 in white.

Here, the MPU 52 shortens the period for setting the obstruction plate 701 in the unobstructed state (for example, 0.3 sec), lengthens the period for setting the obstruction plate 701 in the disturbed state (for example, 0.7 sec), and plays a game in the stage distribution mechanism 73H. The high-frequency obstruction mode, which frequently interferes with the arrival of the ball, increases the period for setting the obstruction plate 701 to the unobstructed state (for example, 0.7 sec), and shortens the period for setting the obstruction state (for example, 0). .3 sec), it has a low frequency disturbing mode that prevents the game ball from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

The MPU 52 executes a lottery to select either the high frequency disturbing mode or the low frequency disturbing mode when the transition of the rotational state from the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783 to the upright state of the second plate 783 is detected. Then, the drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 is executed in the mode in which the lottery is won. The MPU 52 executes a lottery for selecting the high-frequency disturbing mode and the low-frequency disturbing mode with a probability of 50% each, but a lottery for selecting the high-frequency disturbing mode and the low-frequency disturbing mode may be executed with a different probability.

When the obstruction plate 701 is set to the obstruction state in the MPU 52, the subsequent game ball BA2 is obstructed by the obstruction plate 701 and cannot reach the stage distribution mechanism 73H, as shown in FIG. 71. In this case, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Here, in a state where the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes toward the left side in the horizontal direction. It has become. However, since the baffle plate 701 is provided at a position vertically above the tip of the second plate-shaped portion 786, the game ball obstructed by the baffle plate 701 is placed on the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. There is no collision.

On the other hand, when the obstruction plate 701 is set to the unobstructed state in the MPU 52, the subsequent game ball BA2 is not obstructed by the obstruction plate 701 as shown in FIG. 72, and the stage distribution mechanism 73H To reach. However, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that the stage distribution mechanism 73H It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement of the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Since this is not the case, the subsequent game ball BA2 cannot be distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It will be.
Here, in a state where the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes toward the left side in the horizontal direction. It has become. Therefore, the subsequent game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the first plate. It may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is the length of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 when the obstruction plate 701 is set to the unobstructed state by the MPU 52. The ratio of the game balls colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 is set to be about 20%, but the ratio may be different from this.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so that the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (FIG. See the middle-counterclockwise arrow). Further, each plate 783, 784 rotates with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA2 with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 has an end face on the second plate 783 opposite to the rotating shaft 781. It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG. 69.
When the MPU 52 detects the rotation state of the second plate 783 in the upright state and then detects the rotation about the rotation shaft 781, the MPU 52 immediately executes the drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to interfere with the rotation. Since the plate 701 is set to the unobstructed state, the rotation about the rotation shaft 781 is not hindered by the obstruction plate 701.

As described above, in the present reference embodiment, the second gaming state is the first probability state (high frequency disturbing mode) in which the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state based on the first probability. It has a second probability state (low frequency disturbing mode) in which the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the second probability having a higher probability than the first probability.

Therefore, in the present reference embodiment, the first probability state is the first game in the second game state by causing the first game state generating means to generate the first game state based on the first probability. In the state, it is indirectly defined that the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, in the second gaming state, the second probability state gives the first gaming state to the first gaming state generating means based on the second probability having a higher probability than the first probability. By generating it, it is indirectly defined that the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the second probability in the first gaming state.

In other words, in this reference embodiment, the first gaming state is the first probability state (high-frequency disturbing mode) in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability. The second game state generating means has a second probability state (low frequency disturbing mode) in which the second game state is generated based on the second probability having a higher probability than the first probability.
In this reference embodiment, the first probability state and the second probability state indirectly indicate that the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability and the second probability. Although it is specified in, it may be specified directly. In short, the first gaming state is a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates a second gaming state based on the first probability, and a second probability state having a higher probability than the first probability. It suffices that the second game state generating means has a second probability state for generating a second game state based on the probability.

According to this, the first gaming state has a higher probability than the first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability. Since the second gaming state generating means has a second probability state for generating the second gaming state based on the second probability, the player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means, and the second You will play with the expectation that you will be in a two-probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to this reference form as described above, in addition to being able to exert the same actions and effects as those of the reference form D, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(12) The first gaming state is a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates a second gaming state based on the first probability, and a second with a higher probability than the first probability. Since the second gaming state generating means has a second probability state for generating the second gaming state based on the probability of, the player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and has a second probability. You will play in the hope that it will be in a state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present reference embodiment, the second gaming state has the first probability state and the second probability state by differentiating the period for setting the disturbing plate 701 into the non-jamming state and the disturbing state. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the probability of generating the first gaming state can be made different from the first gaming state generating means. For example, in the second gaming state, the state in which the obstruction plate 701 is set in the obstructive state may be set as the first probability state, and the state in which the obstruction plate 701 is set in the non-obstruction state may be set as the second probability state.
Further, in the present reference embodiment, the second gaming state has the first probability state and the second probability state by setting the disturbing plate 701 to the non-jamming state and the disturbing state, but the first gaming state. If the probability of generating the first gaming state can be made different from the generating means, a configuration different from that of the baffle plate 701 may be adopted. For example, in the second gaming state, a motor is attached to the rotating shaft 781 instead of the obstruction plate 701, a large load is applied to the rotating shaft 781 to make it difficult to rotate, and a small load is applied to the rotating shaft 781. The state in which it is easy to rotate may be set as the second probability state.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 73 is a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
In the reference embodiment, the game board 2 includes a variable winning device 27, a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27, and a through gate 31 provided on the right side of the central portion. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the game board 2 includes a lower right game means 8 provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 36, and the lower right game means 8 is provided. Is different from the above reference embodiment in that it includes a variable winning device 27I, a cover 29I, and a through gate 31I.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the firing handle 16, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the lower right game means 8 while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

The game board 2 has a plurality of large and small openings formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing in the game area. Further, the game board 2 includes a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry portion) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry portion) 26, and a variable winning device 27I provided in each opening. And has out ports 28,281. Further, the game board 2 includes through gates 31 and 31I provided on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion, a main display device 32 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 33 provided in the central portion, and the like. And have. Further, the game board 2 has a large number of nails NL planted for appropriately dispersing or adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 27I is provided with detection sensors 301 to 304 (see FIG. 78) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 301 to 304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is provided with the detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is provided with the detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is provided with the detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27I is the detection sensor 304. It has. The pachinko machine 1 executes a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 304. The detection sensors 301 to 304 may be any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 executes 10 prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 24. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of three prize balls when the ball enters the upper operating port 25 and when the ball enters the lower operating port 26. The pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when the balls are entered into the variable winning device 27I. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls at the operating ports 25 and 26 may be different.

FIG. 74 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means is enlarged. In FIG. 74, the vertically upward direction is the Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The lower right game means 8 includes the above-mentioned variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I, and as shown in FIG. 74, the lower right gaming means 8 and the croon 81 provided in the lower region of the symbol display device 36. , The area below the rotary distribution means 82 provided in the region on the right side of the Kroon 81, the open start port 83 provided on the lower right side of the rotary distribution means 82, and the open start port 83. An open winning device 84 provided adjacent to the right side of the variable winning device 27I, an out port 281 provided in the area on the right side of the open winning device 84, and a variable winning device provided in the area on the left side of the through gate 31I. It is equipped with a through gate 85.

The variable winning device 27I drives a large winning opening 271 that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 272 for opening / closing the large winning opening 271, and an opening / closing door 272. It includes a variable winning drive unit 273. In other words, the variable winning device 27I has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27 in the reference embodiment except for its position.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 27I while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

Here, the cover 29I is provided in the lower region of the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84, and includes an opaque panel 292 formed opaquely.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 from the front through the window portion 122.
In the present embodiment, the cover 29I includes only the opaque panel 292, but is transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 can be visually recognized from the front side as in the above reference embodiment. It may be provided with a transparent panel formed in (transparent).

The grand prize opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the large winning opening 271 includes a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening / closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the large winning opening 271. The opening / closing door 272 is in a closed state in which the opening of the grand prize opening 271 is closed by advancing toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 2 to be a game board. By burying it in 2, it has an open state in which the opening of the large winning opening 271 is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 273 sets the open / close door 272 to either the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door 272.

Specifically, the opening / closing door 272 is usually set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 272 is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize.
The opening / closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state so that a game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 271. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing door 272 is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again, it is referred to as one round game.

The out port 281 is provided in the area on the right side of the open winning device 84. The game ball that has flowed down to the right side of the open winning device 84 is discharged from the game area through the out port 281. Further, the flow path of the out port 281 merges with the flow path of the out port 28, and the game ball passing through the out port 281 is detected by the detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of the game ball. It has become so. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the out port 281 unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning ports.

The through gate 31I has the same configuration as the through gate 31 in the reference embodiment except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31I includes a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 306 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 31 and 31I, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out ports 28 and 281, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gates 31 and 31I and the variable winning through gate 85 means that after passing through the gate provided in the game area, the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area. .. The ball entry into the through gates 31 and 31I and the variable winning through gate 85 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged plan view of the Kroon seen from above vertically.
As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the Kroon 81 has a guide rail 811 that guides a game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the rotary distribution means 82 to the Kroon 81, and a game that is guided to the Kroon 81 via the guide rail 811. It includes a disk-shaped swivel surface 812 that swivels the ball, and a side wall 813 provided along the peripheral edge of the swivel surface 812.
The guide rail 811 guides the game ball to the turning surface 812 along the side wall 813.

The swivel surface 812 is formed at a predetermined distance from the center thereof, and three holes 814 to 816 formed at equal intervals from each other, and the holes 814 to 816 formed at the center thereof. It is provided with a protrusion 817 having three side surfaces that incline so as to descend toward the side. Further, the swivel surface 812 is inclined so as to descend from the side wall 813 side toward each hole 814 to 816 side (see FIG. 74).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the Kroon 81 via the guide rail 811 turns the swivel surface 812 along the side wall 813 and then enters any of the holes 814 to 816 (in FIG. 75). See arrow A).

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the Kroon 81 has a guide tube 818 that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 814 and enters the variable winning through gate 85 through the hole 801 formed in the game area. The guide tube 819 is provided to guide the game ball that has entered the holes 815 and 816 and to enter the through gate 31I through the hole 802 formed in the game area.

The rotary distribution means 82 includes a rotating body 821 formed in a substantially V shape as a whole, a rotating shaft 822 that rotatably supports the rotating body 821, and a rotating body driving unit 823 that drives the rotating body 821. I have. The game board 2 has a hole 803 formed in the upper region of the rotating body 821.
The rotating body 821 is formed on the + Z axis direction side, a guide surface 824 formed in a V shape by combining two inclined surfaces, a guide surface 825 formed on the + X axis direction side, and the −X axis. It has a guide surface 826 formed on the directional side.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a Kroon-guided state in which the rotating body is rotated. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a start port guidance state in which the rotating body is rotated.
As shown in FIGS. 74, 76, and 77, the rotating body 821 has three guided states: a normal guided state, a Kroon guided state, and a starting port guided state.
In the normal induction state, as shown in FIG. 74, the rotating body 821 is rotated by rotating the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 so that the guide surface 824 is positioned on the + Z axis direction side and is stationary. The game ball that has flowed down toward the moving body 821 is guided to the hole 803 (see arrow B in the figure).

Here, since the guide surface 824 is inclined so as to descend toward the −Y axis direction side, the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotating body 821 is guided to the hole 803 by using this inclination. Will be done.
Further, the rotary distribution means 82 includes a guide tube 827 that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 803 and enters the through gate 31I through the hole 802 formed in the game area.

In the Kroon-guided state, as shown in FIG. 76, the rotating body 821 becomes a rotating body 821 by rotating the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 825 on the + Z axis direction side. The game ball that has flowed down is guided to the guide rail 811 of Kroon 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
In the starting port guided state, as shown in FIG. 77, the rotating body 821 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 826 on the + Z axis direction side. The game ball that has flowed down toward is guided to the opening start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

The rotating body driving unit 823 sets the rotating body 821 to either a normal guided state or a specific guided state by driving the rotating body 821.
In the normal induction state, the rotating body driving unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the + Z axis direction side and make it stand still.
In the specific induction state, the rotating body driving unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the −Z axis direction side, and then rotates the rotating body 821. It swings left and right so as to reciprocate between the Kroon guided state (see FIG. 76) and the starting port guided state (see FIG. 77).

The open start port 83 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being processed by a router. The open start port 83 includes a detection sensor 307I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 307I is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 executes the opening of the open winning device 84 based on the detection result. The pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the open start opening 83, unlike the cases where the balls enter the various winning openings.

The open winning device 84 drives an open winning opening 841 that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 842 for opening / closing the open winning opening 841, and an opening / closing door 842. It is provided with an open winning drive unit 843.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the firing handle 16, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the open winning device 84 while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

The open winning opening 841 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The open winning opening 841 includes a detection sensor 308I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 308I is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the open winning opening 841.

The opening / closing door 842 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape having a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the open winning opening 841. The opening / closing door 842 is in a closed state in which the opening of the open winning opening 841 is closed by advancing toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2, and is retracted toward the inside of the game board 2 to be a game board. It has an open state in which the opening of the open winning opening 841 is opened by being buried in 2.

The open winning drive unit 843 sets the open / close door 842 to either the open state or the closed state by driving the open / close door 842.
Specifically, the opening / closing door 842 is usually set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize. Then, when the game ball enters the open start opening 83, the opening / closing door 842 is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize under certain conditions.

Here, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening / closing door 842 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball moves to the left side over time while being shaken by this plate surface, and opens / closes. The door 842 can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the open state based on the entry of the game balls into the open start port 83.
Since the opening / closing door 842 of the open winning device 84 is provided adjacent to the right side of the opening / closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, it moves to the left side over time while being shaken by the plate surface of the opening / closing door 842. After that, the game ball moves to the left on the plate surface of the opening / closing door 272.

The variable winning through gate 85 includes a detection sensor 309I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 309I is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.
The variable winning through gate 85 is an opportunity to start a round game when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the transition to the open / close execution mode is entered. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 wins the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery, and after the transition to the open / close execution mode, when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the open / close door The 272 is set to the open state, and the execution of the round game is started a predetermined number of times.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machines>
FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 78, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a voice emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a payout control device 46 and a power supply / launch control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 described above to pay out the game ball. The power supply / launch control device 47 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 41 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure that leaves a trace when the substrate box is opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 constituting the MPU 42. Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 43 and the RAM 44.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 42, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a pass / fail table storage area 431, a distribution table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 43, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 44 has various areas such as various counter areas 441, a holding ball storage area 442, and an electric service holding area 443.

The MPU 42 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main control device 4 and a plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45, the payout control device 46, and the voice emission control device 5. Further, the output port of the MPU 42 includes an electric accessory drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26, a variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening / closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, and an open winning prize. The open winning drive unit 843 that opens and closes the opening / closing door 842 of the device 84, the main display unit 34, and the accessory display unit 35 are connected to each other.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 262 to open and close the electric accessory drive 261. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to open / close the large winning opening 271. Further, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning drive unit 843 to open and close the open winning opening 841. Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the main display unit 34 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the respective operating ports 25 and 26. Further, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 35 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gates 31 and 31I.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply / launch control device 47 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 47. .. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I include various winning openings of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, the variable winning device 27I, and the open winning device 84, the out openings 28, 281 and each. The through gates 31 and 31I, the open starting port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, the MPU 42 includes various winning openings, out openings 28, 281, through gates 31, 31I, open starting openings 83, and variable winning through gates. The winning judgment (ball winning judgment) to 85 is performed. The MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to the player at the time of a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 4. To do.

The power supply / launch control device 47 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the power supply / emission control device 47 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 41, the payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply / emission control device 47 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 47 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 49. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 141 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 23 toward the guide rail 23. The power supply / launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a distribution table in which the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot types are stored.
In the present embodiment, the first distribution table and the second distribution table are different from the reference embodiment.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area 432 (see FIG. 78) of the ROM 43 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 79 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 79 (b). ing.
The MPU 42 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the upper operating port 25. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified low probability high probability result (low probability high probability result corresponding to small round)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are "unspecified". "Round high accuracy result" is assigned, "15-19" is assigned to "explicit small round high accuracy result", and "20 to 29" is assigned to "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 26. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed.
As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the second distribution table has three distribution results of "low probability result", "most advantageous result", and "most advantageous result with special game" as distribution destinations. .. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are "most advantageous results". , And "15-29" are assigned to "the most advantageous result with special game".
Here, the "most advantageous result with special game" is different from the "most advantageous result" in that the special game by the lower right game means 8 is added, and the pachinko machine 1 has the "most advantageous result with special game". Is treated in the same way as the "best result" except for this point. The special game by the lower right game means 8 will be described in detail later.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 27I in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.
"Unspecified small round high probability result", "Explicit small round high probability result", "Most advantageous result", and "Most advantageous result with special game" are opened and closed regardless of the winning / losing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the mode ends. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.
For "Explicit small round high probability result", "Most advantageous result", and "Most advantageous result with special game", the support mode is changed to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result to be set. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning or losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 27I in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 4 executes a process different from that of the reference embodiment. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the contents of various processes different from the reference embodiment will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S107I, as shown in FIG. 80.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I. In this reading process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301 to 304 and 308I corresponding to the various winning openings have detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 42 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and this The set command is transmitted to the payout control device 46. For example, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 308I corresponding to the open winning device 84 has detected the winning of the game ball, the prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number. Is transmitted to the payout control device 46.
The payout control device 46 performs payout control for causing the payout device 48 to execute the payout of the prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 44. To do. If the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 44. If the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for thru. In this through winning process, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each of the through gates 31 and 31I has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening updated in step S103 is performed. The value of the counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area 443. Further, the MPU 42 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp unit 373, and transmits the set command to the voice emission control device 5.
The voice emission control device 5 turns on the third hold lamp unit 373 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 42. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won the through gates 31 and 31I is four, and the third reserved lamp unit 373 lights up by the number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for the operating port.

In step S106I, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for variable winning. In this variable winning prize processing, the MPU 42 sets the variable winning flag in the RAM 44 when it is determined that the detection sensor 309I corresponding to the variable winning through gate 85 has detected the winning of the game ball. .. This variable winning flag is a flag for identifying that a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 85.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets the variable winning flag by substituting 1 into a predetermined area of the RAM 44, and clears the variable winning flag by substituting 0 into a predetermined area of the RAM 44.

In step S107I, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for an open winning.
Hereinafter, the winning process for open winning will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for open prize>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a winning process for open winning.
In the winning process for open winning, the MPU 42 executes steps S4001 to S4004 as shown in FIG. 81.
In step S4001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the game ball has won the open start port 83 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 307I corresponding to the open start port 83 has detected the winning of the game ball. ..

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the game ball has not won a prize in the open start opening 83, the MPU 42 ends the prize processing for the open prize without executing the processes after step S4002.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4001 that the game ball has won a prize in the open start opening 83, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the special gaming flag is set in the RAM 44 in step S4002. This special game in progress flag is a flag for identifying that the special game by the lower right game means 8 is being executed.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the special game is in progress by referring to the special game in-game flag stored in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 sets the special game in-game flag at the time of transition to the special game, and clears the special game in-game flag at the end of the special game. The transition to the special game and the end of the special game will be described in detail later.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special gaming flag is not set, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the open winning without executing the processing after step S4003.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4002 that the special gaming flag is set, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution process of the opening winning opening 841 in step S4003. In this open execution process, the MPU 42 sets the open / close door 842 to the open state by executing the drive control of the open winning drive unit 843.
In the present embodiment, the duration from setting the opening / closing door 842 to the closed state again is 0.17 sec, but even if the duration is different from this. Often, a plurality of durations specified for different lengths of time may be switched.

In step S4004, the MPU 42 sets an open winning command. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the open winning command set in step S4004 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the open winning.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening / closing door 842 is set to the open state based on the open winning command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718, as shown in FIG. 82. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 is different from the reference embodiment in that step S711I is executed instead of step S711.

In step S711I, the MPU 42 sets a flag in the RAM 44 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 42 identifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is an "unspecified low round high probability result". In that case, the implicit small round high probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and the "most advantageous result" is set. If it is specified that it is, the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, and if it is specified that it is "the most advantageous result with special game", the most advantageous result flag with special game is set. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG. 83. In the present embodiment, the MPU 42 is different from the above reference embodiment in that the MPU 42 executes the steps S815I and 816I after executing the step S808, and executes the step S817I before executing the step S811.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S817I.

First, in step S801, a process when the MPU 42 determines that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (processes after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display of the main display unit 34 is completed. When it is determined in step S802 that the variation display of the main display unit 34 has not been completed, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 is completed, whether or not the hit / fail result corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode in step S803. Is determined. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 sets the open / close execution mode flag in the RAM 44, and then executes the processes after step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the winning / failing result does not correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (when it is determined that the winning / failing result is a "normal deviation result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result", the MPU 42 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 42 opens / closes the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27I when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result", that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the sorting result is determined in step S806. Is a small round high probability result (“unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result, the MPU 42 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in step S807. Further, when the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a small round high probability result, that is, the distribution result is a "low probability result", a "most advantageous result", or a "most advantageous result with a special game". If it is determined that the result is, "15" is set in the round counter RC in step S808. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 42 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and the opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 271. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 271 corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the large winning opening 271 once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening / closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening / closing door 272 to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 271 reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing the process of step S808, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S815I. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S816I, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with special game is set in the RAM 44.

When it is determined in step S816I that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.

After executing the process of step S805 or step S807, and when it is determined in step S816I that the most advantageous result flag with special game is not set, the MPU 42 enters the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in step S809. "1000" is set as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the provided timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 determines that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set in step S816I. Except when it is determined, the timer counter T is set to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, the waiting time may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. The configuration may be significantly different depending on the type of.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S801, the process when the MPU 42 determines that the open / close execution mode is in progress (processes after step S817I) will be described.
In step S817I, the MPU 42 executes the special game execution process.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111, as shown in FIG. 84.
In step S4101, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with special game is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is not set, the MPU 42 ends the special game execution process without executing the process after step S4102.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, it determines in step S4102 whether or not the special game in-game flag is set in the RAM 44. To do.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4102 that the special gaming flag is not set, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S4103.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4102 that the special game in-game flag is set, the MPU 42 executes the processes after step S4106.

First, in step S4102, a process when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the special gaming flag is not set (processes after step S4103) will be described.
In step S4103, the MPU 42 clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S4104, the MPU 42 sets a rotation distribution start command. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation distribution start command set in step S4104 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the specific guidance state based on the rotation distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4105, the MPU 42 sets the special gaming flag in the RAM 44. After that, the MPU 42 ends the special game execution process.

Next, in step S4102, processing when it is determined that the special gaming flag is set in MPU 42 (processing after step S4106) will be described.
In step S4106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable winning flag is set in the RAM 44. In other words, the MPU 42 executes a special game, clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S4103, and then enters the variable winning through gate 85, and the RAM 44 receives a variable winning. Determines if the flag has been set.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is not set, the MPU 42 ends the special game execution process without executing the processes after step S4107.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is set, the MPU 42 sets the rotation distribution stop command in step S4107. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation distribution stop command set in step S4107 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal induction state based on the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4108, the MPU 42 clears the special gaming flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S4109, the MPU 42 sets the most advantageous result flag in the RAM 44 in place of the most advantageous result flag with special game stored in the RAM 44.

In step S4110, the MPU 42 sets "1000" as the waiting time (standby period) for the opening in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S4111, the MPU 42 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode. The MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S4111 to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process, the processes after step S811 will be described with reference to FIG. 83.
After executing the special game execution process of step S817I, the MPU 42 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S811.
In step S812, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.

When it is determined in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T becomes "0" or less in step S813. It is determined whether or not it is "0" or less.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, the MPU 42 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S814, and then clears the open / close execution mode flag. Executes the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device>
FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 85, the voice emission control device 5 includes a voice emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the voice emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, a speaker unit 125, a rotating body driving unit 823 for rotating the rotating body 821 of the rotary distribution means 82, and a display control device 6. There is.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 52 executes the drive control of the rotating body driving unit 823 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 4 to rotate the rotating body 821.
Further, the MPU 52 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 6. The voice emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.
In the present embodiment, the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 is executed by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5, but may be executed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4, and the display control device 6 It may be executed by the MPU 62 of.

In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute a process different from that of the reference embodiment. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the contents of various processes different from the reference embodiment will be described.

<About the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 86, the MPU 52 of steps S2414I to S2419I after executing the process of steps S2401 to S2412 and before executing the process of step S2413, substantially similar to the reference embodiment. Execute the process.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that each command has been received in step S2401, the game result is the "most advantageous result"("specialgame" in step S2402 based on the content of the type command. (Including the most favorable result) or "low probability result" is determined.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game") or the "low probability result", the type of the game result is determined in step S2403. The symbol determination process corresponding to is executed. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game"), the MPU 52 finally stops and displays it on the effective line L. As a result, when the information relating to the combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low probability result", the final result is on the effective line L. The information related to the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result to be displayed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game") or the "low probability result", in step S2404, Based on the content of the type command, it is determined whether or not the game result is a "normal deviation result".
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not the "normal deviation result", that is, the game result is the "special deviation result", the "unspecified small round high probability result", and the "explicit small round high probability result". In the case of any of the above, in step S2405, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result that is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected when a "normally out-of-order result" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal deviation result", the MPU 52 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 52 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that the reach display occurs, the MPU 52 determines the information related to the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result of finally displaying the stop display on the effective line L. The combination of the reach display symbols is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 52 finally displays the stop display on the effective line L, and as a stop result, provides information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of each symbol described above. decide. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from the combination of reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406, the MPU 52 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406. Then, the MPU 52 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 provides a data table from the program ROM 63 for executing the display of the start and stop results of the variation display on the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 52. read out. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2408, or when it is determined in step S2401 that the change command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines that the opening command has been received in step S2409, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2410 in the same manner as in the reference mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2414I.

In step S2414I, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the rotation distribution start command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that the rotation distribution start command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2416I.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2414I that the MPU 52 has received the rotation distribution start command, the MPU 52 executes a determination process of the rotation distribution start effect in step S2415I. In the process of determining the effect for starting the rotary distribution, the MPU 52 selects the content of the effect for starting the rotary distribution by referring to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 53. This rotation distribution start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the specific guidance state.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to the specific induction state by executing the drive control of the rotating body driving unit 823 to start the rotation of the rotating body 821 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above. ..

Further, the MPU 52 sets a rotation distribution start effect command related to the rotation distribution start effect determined in the rotation distribution start effect determination process in step S2415I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the rotation distribution start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This rotation distribution start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the rotation distribution start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the rotation distribution start effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the rotation distribution start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2415I, or when it is determined in step S2414I that the rotation distribution start command has not been received, the MPU 52 has received the rotation distribution stop command in step S2416I. To judge.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that the rotation distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2418I.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2416I that the MPU 52 has received the rotation distribution stop command, the MPU 52 executes a determination process of the rotation distribution stop effect in step S2417I. In the process of determining the effect for stopping the rotary distribution, the MPU 52 selects the content of the effect for stopping the rotary distribution by referring to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 53. This effect for stopping the rotation distribution is an effect for notifying the player that the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal induction state.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal induction state by executing the drive control of the rotating body driving unit 823 to stop the rotation of the rotating body 821 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above. ..

Further, the MPU 52 sets a rotation distribution stop effect command related to the rotation distribution stop effect determined in the determination process of the rotation distribution stop effect in step S2417I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the rotation distribution stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This rotation distribution stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the rotation distribution stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the rotation distribution stop effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the rotation distribution stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2417I, or when it is determined in step S2416I that the rotation distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I whether or not the open winning command has been received. To do.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that the open winning command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2413.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the open prize command has been received in step S2418I, the MPU 52 executes the open prize effect determination process in step S2419I. In the process of determining the open prize effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the open prize effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. This open winning effect is an effect for notifying the player that the opening / closing door 842 of the open winning device 84 is set to the open state.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

Further, the MPU 52 sets an open prize effect command related to the open prize effect determined in the process of determining the open prize effect in step S2419I. Then, the MPU 52 stores the open winning effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This open winning effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the open winning effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the open winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the open winning effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2419I, or when it is determined in step S2418I that the open winning command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2413 and subsequent steps.

In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 52 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. After that, the MPU 52 ends the effect determination process.

<About the flow of special games>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a symbol display device, a variable winning device, and an open winning device before executing the special game. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a symbol display device, a variable winning device, and an open winning device in a state where a special game is being executed.
The MPU 42 executes a special game when it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery and is distributed to the "best result with special game" in the distribution lottery.
In addition, the MPU 42 can be distributed to the "best result with special game" in the distribution lottery only when the lottery of the jackpot type is performed with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the lower operating port 26. It has become.

First, the MPU 62 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52, thereby performing high speed. Move to a variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / failing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 62 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 52 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (FIG. 87 (A)). )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number-specified mode in which the round game is performed with a maximum number of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
In the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 in order to suggest a right-handed strike to the player.

Here, in the open / close execution mode, the rotary distribution means 82 is set to the normal induction state. Therefore, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and then is guided to the hole 803 by the rotating body 821, or enters the open start port 83 or the out port 281. Or, it will flow down toward the open winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In the present embodiment, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route can enter the open start port 83 or the out port 281 or flow down toward the open winning device 84. However, by changing the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged vertically above the open start port 83, the ball can be entered into the open start port 83 and the out port 281, or toward the open winning device 84. It may not be able to flow down.

Then, the game ball that has entered the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I via the guide pipe 827, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
The variable winning device 27I and the game ball that has flowed down toward the open winning device 84 will win a prize in the large winning opening 271 when the large winning opening 271 is opened.
In the "most advantageous result", since the special game is not executed, the opening / closing door 842 is not set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the opening start port 83.

After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed. By shifting from the side of the upper working port to the side of the side opposite to the upper working opening 25, the probability of winning the lower working opening 26 can be increased rather than the upper working opening 25.
Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the rotary distribution means 82 is set to the normal induction state. Therefore, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route will flow down toward the rotating body 821 and then be guided to the hole 803 by the rotating body 821 (see arrow B in FIG. 74).

Then, the game ball that has entered the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I via the guide pipe 827, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 31I is the electric service open state. If the result corresponds to the transition, the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operating port 26
Is in an open state in a predetermined manner.
When a prize is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. Can be done.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

Next, the MPU 62 starts variable display of a plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52. Shift to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment).
Then, when the winning / losing lottery results in a "big hit" and the lottery is assigned to the "best result with special game", the MPU 62 receives a stop result command received from the MPU 52 after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L to notify the result of the winning / failing lottery (Fig.). 87 (D)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 executes a special game.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the MPU 62 is sorted into the "best result with special game" in the sorting lottery, the MPU 62 is a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result (in this embodiment, "7. 7 ・ 7 ”) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L, but a combination of symbols different from the case where it is distributed to the“ most advantageous result ”in the distribution lottery (for example,“ V ・ V ・ V ”) is effective. The stop display may be displayed on the line L.

In the "best result with special game", the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the specific guidance state based on the rotation distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process. ..
Specifically, the MPU 52 sets the rotary distribution means 82 to the specific guidance state, and the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning / failing lottery, and then, as shown in FIG. 88A, the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 Executes the rotation distribution start effect selected in.
Here, when the rotation distribution start effect is executed, the winning / failing lottery mode is still set to the high probability mode, and the support mode clears the high frequency support mode flag by the process of step S815I. Therefore, it is set to low frequency support mode. In other words, when executing the effect for starting the rotation distribution, it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to a small round)" in the distribution lottery. It is in the same state as when it is sorted.

In the rotation distribution start effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 in order to suggest the player to hit right. In addition, the MPU 62 displays an angel character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and causes the player to enter the game ball into the croon with the line "Aim for the croon !!" of this character. Suggests.

In the specific induction state of the rotation distribution means 82, the rotating body driving unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the −Z axis direction side, and then the rotating body. The 821 is rotated to reciprocate between the Kroon guided state (see FIG. 76) and the starting port guided state (see FIG. 77) so as to swing left and right.

In the Kroon-guided state, as shown in FIG. 76, the rotating body 821 becomes a rotating body 821 by rotating the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 825 on the + Z axis direction side. The game ball that has flowed down is guided to the guide rail 811 of Kroon 81 (see arrow B in the figure).

The game ball guided by the Kroon 81 turns the swivel surface 812 along the side wall 813 and then enters any of the holes 814 to 816 (see arrow A in FIG. 75).
When a game ball enters the hole 814 of the Kroon 81, the game ball is guided by a guide tube 818 to the hole 801 formed in the game area, and then discharged from the hole 801 for variable winning. The ball will enter the through gate 85.

When the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal induction state based on the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42. , Executes a predetermined process.
In the rotation distribution stop effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the MPU 62 displays the character "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the normal induction state of the rotary distribution means 82, as shown in FIG. 74, the rotary body 821 rotates the rotary body 821 around the rotary shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the + Z axis direction side. By making it stationary, the game ball that has flowed down toward the rotating body 821 is guided to the hole 803 (see arrow B in the figure).

The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-time mode.
In the open / close execution mode, as shown in FIG. 88C, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 in order to suggest a right-handed hit to the player.

Here, in the open / close execution mode, the rotary distribution means 82 is set to the normal induction state. Therefore, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and then is guided to the hole 803 by the rotating body 821, or enters the open start port 83 or the out port 281. Or, it will flow down toward the open winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In the present embodiment, the game ball launched toward the right-handed route can enter the open start port 83 or the out port 281 or flow down toward the open winning device 84. However, by changing the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged vertically above the open start port 83, the ball can be entered into the open start port 83 and the out port 281, or toward the open winning device 84. It may not be able to flow down.

Then, the game ball that has entered the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I via the guide pipe 827, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
The variable winning device 27I and the game ball that has flowed down toward the open winning device 84 will win a prize in the large winning opening 271 when the large winning opening 271 is opened.
Since the special game is not executed in the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 842 is not set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the open start port 83.

After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest the player to hit right (see FIG. 87 (C)).

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the holes 815 and 816 of the Kroon 81, the game ball is guided by the guide tube 819 to the hole 802 formed in the game area, and then the hole 802. It will be discharged from the ball and enter the through gate 31I.
In this case, since the MPU 52 does not receive the rotation distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, the specific guidance state of the rotation distribution means 82 is maintained.

In the starting port guided state, as shown in FIG. 77, the rotating body 821 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotating shaft 822 to position the guide surface 826 on the + Z axis direction side. The game ball that has flowed down toward is guided to the opening start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).
The game ball guided to the open start port 83 enters the open start port 83 and the out port 281 and flows down toward the open winning device 84 (see FIG. 77).
In the present embodiment, the game ball guided to the open start port 83 enters the open start port 83 and the out port 281, and flows down toward the open winning device 84. However, the ball may be entered only in the open starting port 83.

During the execution of the special game, the opening / closing door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the opening start port 83.
When the open / close door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of the game ball into the open start port 83, the MPU 52 sets the open / close door 842 to the open state based on the open winning command transmitted from the MPU 42. Recognize that it has been done and execute a predetermined process.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the MPU 62 executes the open winning effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

In the open winning effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow at the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 in order to suggest the player to hit right. In addition, the MPU 62 displays the devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and sets the opening / closing door 842 to the player in the open state in the dialogue "Charging !!" of this character. Suggest.
During the execution of the special game, the MPU 62 executes the open winning effect each time the game ball enters the open starting port 83 until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. Will be done. Then, when the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 62 displays the character "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 as described above (FIG. 88). See (B)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the open / close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a specific ball entry means for starting the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the special game execution process, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4, the game in the specific control state is started when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. It functions as a specific control start means.
Then, the lower right game means 8 determines the game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 shifts the game state to the specific control state and before the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process. Functions as a special game execution means for executing different special games.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 shifts the gaming state to the specific control state by the main control device 4, and then performs the specific control before starting the game in the specific control state by the special game execution process. Since the lower right gaming means 8 for executing the special game different from the game in the state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as special game payout means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
Further, in the present embodiment, the Kroon 81 guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. It functions as a ball delay means.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special game route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the lower right game means 8 includes an open start port 83 and an open winning device 84 for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area. The number of game balls can be increased when a special game is executed.
Further, the lower right game means 8 guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the special game execution process after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

In the present embodiment, the Kroon 81 is adopted as the ball entry delay means, but the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and this game ball is used as the variable winning through gate 85. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the time until the ball enters can be delayed. For example, in the present embodiment, the Kroon 81 is provided with three holes 814 to 816, but guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and guides the game ball to the variable winning through gate 85. Only one hole may be provided as long as the time until the ball enters the 85 can be delayed. Further, for example, by adopting another mechanism such as a rotating body, a gate mechanism, or a gentle slope, a game ball flowing down the game area is guided to a variable winning through gate 85, and this game ball is used for variable winning. The time until the ball enters the through gate 85 may be delayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 are adopted as the special game payout means, but what if the game ball can be paid out when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered? The configuration may be adopted. For example, a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, and the like may be adopted.
Further, in the present embodiment, the right-handed route is adopted as the special game route leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means, but the left-handed route may be adopted, and the inside of the large winning opening may be adopted. Other routes, such as a route or a route inside a character, may be adopted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 play a game according to the length of the period for delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the variable winning through gate 85 at the Kroon 81. Giving profits to people.
Therefore, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 are in the period from after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4 until the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process. It also functions as a period profit-giving means for giving profits to players according to their length.

According to such a configuration, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 start the game in the specific control state by the special game execution process after shifting the game state to the specific control state by the main control device 4. It is possible to give a profit to the player according to the length of the period before doing so. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 are adopted as the period profit giving means, and after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4, it is specified by the special game execution process. By increasing the number of times the open winning device 84 is opened according to the length of the period before the start of the game in the controlled state, the number of game balls is increased to give the player a profit. Anything may be given to the player as long as the profit can be given. For example, information useful to the player may be given, or a situation may be given in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be promoted advantageously.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 functions as a special game entry means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area, and the open winning device 84 is used when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered. It functions as a means for paying out game balls. Then, the open winning device 84 is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the open start port 83.

According to such a configuration, the open winning device 84 is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the open start port 83, so that the player can enter the open start port. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball enters the 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open winning device 84 is in an unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area to be able to enter when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and the open start. It has a regulated state that restricts the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that the ball cannot enter the mouth 83 when the game ball enters the mouth 83. Specifically, the open winning device 84 is in the non-regulated state when the special gaming flag is set in the RAM 44, and is in the regulated state when the special gaming flag is not set in the RAM 44.
Then, in the winning process for the open winning, when the special game is being executed (when the special gaming flag is set in the RAM 44), the open winning device 84 is switched to the unregulated state and the special game is executed. If not (when the special gaming flag is not set in the RAM 44), the open winning device 84 functions as a regulated state switching means for switching to the regulated state.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the open winning device 84 to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and regulates the open winning device 84 when the special game is not being executed. Since it is equipped with a winning process for opening winning to switch to the state, when the player is executing a special game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the opening starting port 83 and is not executing the special game. In addition, the game ball will not be fired at the open start port 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the open winning device 84 is in an unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and the open start. It has a regulated state that regulates the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the mouth 83, and the prize processing for the open prize is performed by executing a special game. The open winning device 84 was switched to the non-regulated state, and the open winning device 84 was switched to the regulated state when the special game was not executed.

On the other hand, in the open winning device 84, the first period is a predetermined period from when the game ball enters the open starting port 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter. The second period is longer than the predetermined period, which is the period of waiting for the ball to enter and the period from when the game ball enters the open start port 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter. It may have a waiting period for entering a ball. In this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and opens the pachinko machine 1 when the special game is not being executed. It suffices to provide a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the winning device 84 to the second ball entry waiting period.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the pachinko machine 1 is open winning. Since the device 84 is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the device 84 to the second ball entry waiting period, the player launches the game ball aiming at the open start port 83 when the special game is being executed. , When the special game is not executed, the game ball will not be fired at the open start port 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 reaches the left-handed route (first route) leading to the upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26, and reaches the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84, and reaches the left-handed route. It has a right-handed route (second route) different from that of.
Then, the above-mentioned regulation state switching means and the ball entry standby period switching means suppress the firing of the game ball toward the right-handed route by switching the states of the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. It is functioning as a means.

According to such a configuration, the launch suppressing means suppresses the firing of the game ball toward the right-handed route by switching the states of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84, so that the player can use the player. Aiming at the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84, the game ball will not be fired toward the right-handed route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

In the present embodiment, the launch suppressing means switches the open winning device 84 to the non-regulated state or the regulated state, or switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball waiting period or the second ball waiting period. By doing so, it is suppressed to launch the game ball toward the right-handed route, but by switching the states of the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84, the game ball is launched toward the right-handed route. Any state of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 may be switched as long as the above can be suppressed. For example, the launch suppressing means may suppress the firing of the game ball toward the right-handed route by switching the length of time for setting the open winning device 84 to be able to enter the ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the Kroon 81 has a turning surface 812 for turning the game ball. Then, the hole 814 functions as a guideable hole that enables the game ball that turns the turning surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and the holes 815 and 816 make a variable winning of the game ball that turns the turning surface 812. It functions as a non-guideable hole that makes it impossible to guide the through gate 85.

According to such a configuration, the Kroon 81 has a hole 814 that can guide the game ball that turns the turning surface 812 to the variable winning through gate 85, and a variable winning through gate that makes the game ball that turns the turning surface 812. Since the 85 is provided with holes 815 and 816 that cannot be guided, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4, before the game in the specific control state is started by the special game execution process. The time until can be delayed, and the configuration of the Kroon 81 can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 82 functions as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotary distribution means 82 that distributes a game ball flowing down a right-handed route to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means. , The game is played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotary distribution means 82. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 82 is adopted as the special distribution means, but if the game ball flowing down the right-handed route can be distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. , Any configuration may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means (specific guidance state) and the right-handed ball. It has a non-sortable state (normally guided state) in which the game ball flowing down the route is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
Then, in the special game execution process, when the special game is being executed (when the special game in-game flag is set in the RAM 44), the rotation distribution means 82 is switched to the specific guidance state, and the special game is executed. If not (when the special gaming flag is not set in the RAM 44), it functions as a distribution state switching means for switching the rotary distribution means 82 to the normal induction state.

According to such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 1 is executing the special game (when the flag during the special game is set in the RAM 44), the pachinko machine 1 switches the rotation distribution means 82 to the specific guidance state, and specially When the game is not being executed (when the special game in-game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the player is provided with a special game execution process for switching the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal guidance state, so that the player can perform the special game. The game is played with the expectation that the rotation distribution means 82 will be switched to the specific guidance state in the execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board 2 in the specific guidance state, and in the normal guidance state. , The game ball flowing down the right-handed route is distributed so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2.

According to such a configuration, in the specific guidance state, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board 2, and the normal guidance state. Then, since the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2, the pachinko machine 1 diversifies the flow of the game ball. be able to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area by the rotary distribution means 82 to the variable winning through gate 85, and then the variable winning through gate. As a specific profit-giving means for giving a profit to the player based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 82 before the game ball enters the 85. It is functioning.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this way, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters. Anything can be used as long as a game ball flowing down the game area can be inserted. For example, the specific ball-entry means may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, or the like.
Further, the specific profit-giving means does not have to be the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 that pay out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, and if the player can be given a profit, Information useful to the player may be given, a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be promoted advantageously may be given, or anything may be given.

According to such a configuration, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area by the rotary distribution means 82 to the variable winning through gate 85, and then the variable winning through gate. Before the game ball enters the 85, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 82. You can enjoy the benefits given by the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the specific guidance state, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board 2, and the normal guidance state. Then, the game balls flowing down the right-handed route are distributed so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 includes a rotary distribution means 82 that distributes the game balls flowing down the game area to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path. Then, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and distributes the game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing through the back surface of the game board 2. ing.

According to such a configuration, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to the first distribution flow path by passing it through the front surface of the game board 2, and passes the back surface of the game board 2 to the second distribution flow. Since the game balls are distributed to the road, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game balls.

In the present embodiment, the first distribution flow path adopts a flow path leading to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and the second distribution flow path is the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means. Although a flow path that does not distribute the game ball is adopted as any of the delay means, any flow path may be adopted as the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path. For example, the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path are a flow path to the large winning opening, a flow path to the V winning opening, a flow path to the general winning opening, a flow path to each operating port, or It may be a flow path leading to a through gate. Further, these flow paths may be located in any part of the game machine, and may be, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 gives the player a primary benefit of initiating a game in a specific controlled state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball. The flow path in the Kroon-guided state functions as a primary flow path for allowing a game ball to enter the primary ball entry region.
Further, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 have a secondary benefit (from the first benefit) that when a ball is entered into the open winning opening 841, 15 prize balls are paid out. It functions as a secondary ball entry area that gives the player a small profit), and the flow path in the starting port guided state allows the game ball to enter the secondary ball entry area. It functions as a flow path for.
Further, the lower operating port 26 and the out port 28 execute the payout of three prize balls when the ball enters the lower operating port 26, and when the ball enters the out port 28. Functions as a third ball entry area that gives the player a third profit (a profit smaller than the second profit) that the prize ball is not paid out, and is a flow path in a normal guided state. Functions as a third-order flow path that allows a game ball to enter the third-order entry region.
Then, the rotary distribution means 82 is placed in an operating state (specific guidance state) that allows the game ball to flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and in the third flow path. It has a non-operating state (normally guided state) that allows the game ball to flow down, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (start of a special game). ..

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific guided state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the Kroon-guided flow path or the start port-guided flow path, and the normal-guided flow path. Since it has a normal guidance state that allows the game ball to flow down, and is provided with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal guidance state to a specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player is special. Based on the start of the game, the game is played with the expectation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the Kroon guided state, the flow path in the starting port guided state, and the flow path in the normal guided state are different from each other in the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board 2. ing. Specifically, the flow path in the Kroon guided state and the flow path in the starting port guided state form a flow path on the surface of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guided state is a flow path on the back surface of the game board 2. Is forming.

According to such a configuration, the flow path in the Kroon guided state, the flow path in the starting port guided state, and the flow path in the normal guided state are different from each other in the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the gaming board 2. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game ball. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, there are three flow paths in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route: a flow path in the Kroon guided state, a flow path in the starting port guided state, and a flow path in the normal guided state. Even when it is necessary to form a path, the limited space of the game board 2 can be effectively used to efficiently form a flow path.

In the present embodiment, the flow path in the Kroon guided state, the flow path in the starting port guided state, and the flow path in the normal guided state have surfaces forming three flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board 2. Although different, the number of flow paths does not have to be three, and may be two or more.
Further, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the Kroon guided state and the flow path in the starting port guided state form a flow path on the surface of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guided state is on the back surface of the game board 2. Although the flow path is formed, the surface of the game board 2 that forms the flow path in the front and back directions may be opposite to this.

Here, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the Kroon-guided state guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and causes the game ball to enter the variable winning through gate 85. The Kroon 81 is provided as a ball entry delay means for delaying the time.
Then, the pachinko machine 1 flows down the flow path in the starting port guided state until the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the crune 81 enters the variable winning through gate 85. When the game ball of No. 1 enters the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84, 15 prize balls are immediately paid out to give a secondary profit.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is in a starting port guided state until the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the croon 81 enters the variable winning through gate 85. When another gaming ball flowing down the flow path enters the open start port 83 and the open prize device 84, 15 prize balls are immediately paid out to give a second profit. Therefore, the player immediately receives 15 balls even while waiting for the game balls guided by the variable winning through gate 85 at the Kroon 81 to enter the variable winning through gate 85. The prize balls can be paid out and the second benefit can be enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 82 causes the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path in the Kroon-guided state or the flow path in the starting port-guided state in the specific guidance state. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state and the flow path in the starting port-guided state is the same.
On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state and the flow path in the starting port guided state does not have to be the same. For example, the game ball is placed in the flow path in the starting port guided state. The rate of flowing down may be larger than the rate of flowing down the game ball into the flow path in the Kroon-guided state.

According to such a configuration, in the specific guidance state, the rotary distribution means 82 causes the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path in the Kroon-guided state or the flow path in the starting port-guided state, and is in the starting port-guided state. Since the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path is larger than the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state. Will be done. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 is a game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 shifts the game state to the specific control state and before the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process. Since the lower right gaming means 8 for executing different special games is provided, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the lower right game means 8 includes an open start port 83 and an open winning device 84 that pay out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, the player can execute the special game. The number of game balls can be increased.
Further, the lower right game means 8 guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the special game execution process after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the main control device 4.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the right-handed route.

(3) Since the open winning device 84 is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the open start port 83, the player can enter the game ball into the open start port 83. You will pay attention to whether or not you will enter the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(4) The pachinko machine 1 switches the open winning device 84 to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and switches the open winning device 84 to the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. Since the player is provided with a winning process for the game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the open start port 83 when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the open start port is provided. Aiming at 83, the game ball will not be fired. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The Kroon 81 has a hole 814 that allows the game ball that turns the turning surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and the game ball that turns the turning surface 812 cannot be guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Since the holes 815 and 816 are provided, the time from the transition of the game state to the specific control state by the main control device 4 to the start of the game in the specific control state by the special game execution process is delayed. The configuration of the Kroon 81 can be simplified.
(6) Since the pachinko machine 1 includes a rotary distribution means 82 that distributes a game ball flowing down a right-handed route to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means, the player can use the rotary distribution means. At 82, the game is played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) When the pachinko machine 1 is executing a special game (when the special game in-game flag is set in the RAM 44), the pachinko machine 1 switches the rotation distribution means 82 to the specific guidance state and executes the special game. If there is no special game execution process (when the special game in-game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the rotation distribution means 82 is provided with a special game execution process for switching to the normal guidance state. Therefore, the player rotates in the special game execution process. The game is played with the expectation that the distribution means 82 can be switched to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(8) In the specific guidance state, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, the game board 2 Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game ball.

(9) The open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 are the period after the game state is changed to the specific control state by the main control device 4 and before the game in the specific control state is started by the special game execution process. It is possible to give a profit to the player according to the length of the player. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(10) In the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84, the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary distribution means 82, and then the game balls are transferred to the variable winning through gate 85. Before entering the ball, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 82, so that the player can use the open start port 83 and the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. You can enjoy the benefits given by the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) The rotary distribution means 82 distributes the game ball to the first distribution flow path by passing it through the front surface of the game board 2, and transfers the game ball to the second distribution flow path by passing it through the back surface of the game board 2. Since the pachinko machines are sorted, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of the game balls.

(12) The pachinko machine 1 causes the game ball to flow down into either the flow path in the Kroon guided state or the flow path in the starting port guided state, and the flow path in the normal guided state. Since it has a normal guidance state that enables it, and is provided with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player is based on the start of the special game. Therefore, the game is played with the expectation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(13) The flow path in the Kroon guided state, the flow path in the starting port guided state, and the flow path in the normal guided state are different from each other in the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 Can diversify the flow of game balls. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, there are three flow paths in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route: a flow path in the Kroon guided state, a flow path in the starting port guided state, and a flow path in the normal guided state. Even when it is necessary to form a path, the limited space of the game board 2 can be effectively used to efficiently form a flow path.

(14) The pachinko machine 1 flows down the flow path in the starting port guided state until the game ball guided to the variable winning through gate 85 by the croon 81 enters the variable winning through gate 85. When another game ball enters the open start opening 83 and the open prize device 84, 15 prize balls are immediately paid out and a second profit is given. Therefore, the game is played. The person immediately pays out 15 prize balls even while waiting for the game ball guided by the variable winning through gate 85 in Kroon 81 to enter the variable winning through gate 85. It can be executed and enjoy the second benefit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an enlarged front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. In FIG. 89, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the first embodiment, the lower right gaming means 8 includes the above-mentioned variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I, as well as a croon 81, a rotary distribution means 82, and an open starting port 83. , An open winning device 84, an out port 281 and a variable winning through gate 85 were provided.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the lower right game means 8 includes the moving distribution means 86J instead of the rotary distribution means 82, which is different from the first embodiment. different. The game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that the game board 2 does not have a hole 803.

The moving distribution means 86J drives a moving body 861 formed in a substantially triangular columnar shape, a moving shaft 862 that movably supports the moving body 861 along the horizontal direction (X-axis direction), and the moving body 861. It is provided with a mobile body driving unit 863. The game board 2 has an elongated hole 804 formed so that the moving shaft 862 is inserted and the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction.
The moving body 861 has a guide surface 864 formed on the −X axis direction side and a guide surface 865 formed on the + X axis direction side.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a Kroon-guided state in which a moving body is moved. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a start port guidance state in which the moving body is moved.
As shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the moving body 861 has three guided states: a normal guided state, a Kroon guided state, and a starting port guided state.
In the normal induction state, as shown in FIG. 89, the moving body 861 moves the moving shaft 862 toward the + X axis direction and makes the guide surfaces 864 and 865 rest below the nail NL3J group, thereby causing the nail NL3J group and the moving body 861. The game ball that has flowed down between the nails NL4J group is allowed to flow down as it is and guided to the through gate 31I (see arrow B in the figure).

In the crune-guided state, the moving body 861 moves by moving the moving shaft 862 toward the −X axis direction and positioning the guide surface 864 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group, as shown in FIG. The game ball that has flowed down toward the body 861 is guided to the guide rail 811 of the crune 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
In the starting port guided state, as shown in FIG. 91, the moving body 861 further moves the moving shaft 862 toward the −X axis direction to position the guide surface 865 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group. , The game ball that has flowed down toward the moving body 861 is guided to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

The moving body driving unit 863 sets the moving body 861 to either a normal guided state or a specific guided state by driving the moving body 861.
In the normal induction state, the moving body driving unit 863 moves the moving shaft 862 toward the + X axis direction to make the guide surfaces 864 and 865 rest below the nail NL3J group.
In the specific guidance state, the moving body driving unit 863 moves the moving body 862 toward the −X axis direction to position the guide surfaces 864 and 865 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group, and then moves the moving body 861. It swings left and right by moving it back and forth between the crune guidance state (see FIG. 90) and the start port guidance state (see FIG. 91).

In the present embodiment, the main control device 4 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special game execution process is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the special game execution process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111, as shown in FIG. 92. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S4104J is executed instead of the process of step S4104, and the process of step S4107J is executed instead of the process of step S4107. ..

In step S4104J, the MPU 42 sets a moving distribution start command. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the movement distribution start command set in step S4104J to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the moving distribution means 86J has been set to the specific guidance state based on the moving distribution start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4107J, the MPU 42 sets the movement distribution stop command. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the movement distribution stop command set in step S4107J to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the moving distribution means 86J is set to the normal guidance state based on the moving distribution stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device>
FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 93, the voice emission control device 5 includes a voice emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the voice emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, a speaker unit 125, a mobile body drive unit 863 that moves the mobile body 861 of the mobile distribution means 86J, and a display control device 6. There is.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 52 executes the drive control of the moving body driving unit 863 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 4 to move the moving body 861.
Further, the MPU 52 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 6. The voice emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.
In the present embodiment, the drive control of the mobile body drive unit 863 is executed by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5, but may be executed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4, and the display control device 6 It may be executed by the MPU 62 of.

In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<About the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG. 94. In this embodiment, the MPU 52 is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S2414J to S2417J are executed instead of the processes of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414J, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the movement distribution start command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that the movement distribution start command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2416J.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2414J that the MPU 52 has received the moving distribution start command, the MPU 52 executes the moving distribution start effect determination process in step S2415J. In the process of determining the effect for starting the moving distribution, the MPU 52 selects the content of the effect for starting the moving distribution by referring to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 53. This moving distribution start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the moving distribution means 86J has been set to the specific guidance state. In the present embodiment, the effect for starting the moving distribution is the same as the effect for starting the rotary distribution in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the mobile distribution means 86J to the specific guidance state by executing the drive control of the mobile body drive unit 863 to start the movement of the mobile body 861 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above. ..

Further, the MPU 52 sets a moving distribution start effect command related to the moving distribution start effect determined in the process of determining the moving distribution start effect in step S2415J. Then, the MPU 52 stores the movement distribution start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This moving distribution start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the moving distribution start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the moving distribution start effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the moving distribution start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2415J, or when it is determined in step S2414J that the moving distribution start command has not been received, the MPU 52 has received the moving distribution stop command in step S2416J. To judge.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that the movement distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2418I.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2416J that the MPU 52 has received the moving distribution stop command, the MPU 52 executes the process of determining the moving distribution stop effect in step S2417J. In the process of determining the effect for stopping the moving distribution, the MPU 52 selects the content of the effect for stopping the moving distribution by referring to the table for the effect stored in advance in the ROM 53. This moving distribution stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the moving distribution means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state. In the present embodiment, the effect for stopping the moving distribution is the same as the effect for stopping the rotary distribution in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.
Further, the MPU 52 sets the mobile distribution means 86J to the normal guidance state by executing the drive control of the mobile body drive unit 863 to stop the movement of the mobile body 861 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above. ..

Further, the MPU 52 sets a moving distribution stop effect command related to the moving distribution stop effect determined in the process of determining the moving distribution stop effect in step S2417J. Then, the MPU 52 stores the movement distribution stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This moving distribution stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the moving distribution stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the moving distribution stop effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the moving distribution stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2417J, or when it is determined in step S2416J that the movement distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2418I and subsequent steps as in the first embodiment. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the moving distribution means 86J functions as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes a moving distribution means 86J that distributes a game ball flowing down a right-handed route to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means, so that the player can use the pachinko machine 1. , The game is played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means by the moving distribution means 86J. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the moving distribution means 86J is adopted as the special distribution means, but if the game ball flowing down the right-handed route can be distributed to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means. , Any configuration may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the moving distribution means 86J has a distribution possible state (specific guidance state) in which the game ball flowing down the right-handed route is distributed to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means, and the right-handed ball. It has a non-distribution state (normal guidance state) in which the game balls flowing down the route are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
Then, in the special game execution process, when the special game is being executed (when the special game in-game flag is set in the RAM 44), the movement distribution means 86J is switched to the specific guidance state, and the special game is executed. If not (when the special gaming flag is not set in the RAM 44), the moving distribution means 86J functions as a distribution state switching means for switching to the normal induction state.

According to such a configuration, when the pachinko machine 1 is executing the special game (when the special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44), the pachinko machine 1 switches the moving distribution means 86J to the specific guidance state, and specially When the game is not being executed (when the special game in-game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the player is provided with a special game execution process for switching the moving distribution means 86J to the normal guidance state, so that the player can perform the special game. The game is played with the expectation that the moving distribution means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state in the execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the moving distribution means 86J, and then the variable winning through gate. As a specific profit-giving means for giving a profit to the player based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the moving distribution means 86J before the game ball enters the 85. It is functioning.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this way, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters. Anything can be used as long as a game ball flowing down the game area can be inserted. Further, the specific profit-giving means does not have to be the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 that pay out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, and if the player can be given a profit, Information useful to the player may be given, a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be promoted advantageously may be given, or anything may be given.

According to such a configuration, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the moving distribution means 86J, and then the variable winning through gate. Before the game ball enters the 85, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the moving distribution means 86J. You can enjoy the benefits given by the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 gives the player a primary benefit of initiating a game in a specific controlled state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball. The flow path in the Kroon-guided state functions as a primary flow path for allowing a game ball to enter the primary ball entry region.
Further, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 have a secondary benefit (from the first benefit) that when a ball is entered into the open winning opening 841, 15 prize balls are paid out. It functions as a secondary ball entry area that gives the player a small profit), and the flow path in the starting port guided state allows the game ball to enter the secondary ball entry area. It functions as a flow path for.
Further, the lower operating port 26 and the out port 28 execute the payout of three prize balls when the ball enters the lower operating port 26, and when the ball enters the out port 28. Functions as a third ball entry area that gives the player a third profit (a profit smaller than the second profit) that the prize ball is not paid out, and is a flow path in a normal guided state. Functions as a third-order flow path that allows a game ball to enter the third-order entry region.
Then, the moving distribution means 86J is placed in an operating state (specific guidance state) that allows the game ball to flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and in the third flow path. It has a non-operating state (normally guided state) that allows the game ball to flow down, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (start of a special game). ..

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific guided state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the Kroon-guided flow path or the start port-guided flow path, and the normal-guided flow path. Since it has a normal guidance state that allows the game ball to flow down, and is equipped with a moving distribution means 86J that changes from the normal guidance state to a specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player is special. Based on the start of the game, the game is played with the expectation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the specific guidance state, the moving distribution means 86J causes the game ball to flow down only in the flow path in the Kroon-guided state or the flow path in the starting port-guided state. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state and the flow path in the starting port-guided state is the same.
On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state and the flow path in the starting port guided state does not have to be the same. For example, the game ball is placed in the flow path in the starting port guided state. The rate of flowing down may be larger than the rate of flowing down the game ball into the flow path in the Kroon-guided state.

According to such a configuration, in the specific guidance state, the moving distribution means 86J causes the game ball to flow down only in either the flow path in the Kroon-guided state or the flow path in the starting port-guided state, and is in the starting port-guided state. Since the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path is larger than the ratio of the game ball flowing down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down the flow path in the Kroon-guided state. Will be done. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (5), (9), and (14) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects Can play.
(15) Since the pachinko machine 1 includes a moving distribution means 86J that distributes a game ball flowing down a right-handed route to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means, the player can use the moving distribution means. At 86J, the game will be played with the expectation that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(16) When the pachinko machine 1 is executing a special game (when the special gaming flag is set in the RAM 44), the pachinko machine 1 switches the moving distribution means 86J to the specific guidance state and executes the special game. If there is no special game execution process (when the special game in-game flag is not set in the RAM 44), the movement distribution means 86J is provided with a special game execution process for switching to the normal guidance state, so that the player moves in the special game execution process. The game is played with the expectation that the distribution means 86J can be switched to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(17) In the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84, the game ball flowing down the game area is distributed to the variable winning through gate 85 by the moving distribution means 86J, and then the game ball is transferred to the variable winning through gate 85. Before entering the ball, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the moving distribution means 86J, so that the player can use the open start port 83 and the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. You can enjoy the benefits given by the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(18) The pachinko machine 1 causes the game ball to flow down into either the flow path in the Kroon guided state or the flow path in the starting port guided state, and the flow path in the normal guided state. Since it has a normal guidance state that enables it, and is provided with a moving distribution means 86J that changes from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player is based on the start of the special game. Therefore, the game is played with the expectation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 95 is an enlarged front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. In FIG. 95, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
In the first embodiment, the lower right gaming means 8 includes the above-mentioned variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I, as well as a croon 81, a rotary distribution means 82, and an open starting port 83. , An open winning device 84, an out port 281 and a variable winning through gate 85 were provided.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the lower right gaming means 8 includes the rotary distribution means 87K instead of the rotary distribution means 82, which is different from the first embodiment. different. The rotary distribution means 87K is a wind turbine attached to the game board 2. The game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that the game board 2 does not have a hole 803.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the croon by the rotary distribution means. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the open start port by the rotary distribution means.
As shown in FIG. 96, the rotary distribution means 87K rotates counterclockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) by receiving the game ball flowing down toward the rotary distribution means 87K, and the rotary distribution means 87K. The game ball that has flowed down toward the means 87K is guided to the guide rail 811 of the crune 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
As shown in FIG. 97, the rotary distribution means 87K rotates clockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) by receiving the game ball flowing down toward the rotary distribution means 87K, and the rotary distribution means 87K. The game ball that has flowed down toward 87K is guided to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

In the present embodiment, the main control device 4 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the special game execution process is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the special game execution process in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111, as shown in FIG. 98. In the present embodiment, the MPU 42 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S4104K is executed instead of the process of step S4104, and the process of step S4107K is executed instead of the process of step S4107. ..

In step S4104K, the MPU 42 sets a special game start command. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the special game start command set in step S4104K to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the special game has been started based on the special game start command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4107K, the MPU 42 sets a special game stop command. Further, the MPU 42 transmits the special game stop command set in step S4107K to the voice emission control device 5 in step S301 of the normal process.
The voice emission control device 5 recognizes that the special game has been stopped based on the special game stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device>
FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 99, the voice emission control device 5 includes a voice emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the voice emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into chips in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, a speaker unit 125, and a display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 4.
Further, the MPU 52 transmits a command as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control device 6. The voice emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

In the present embodiment, the voice emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect determination process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the content of the effect determination process in the present embodiment will be described.

<About the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG. 100. In this embodiment, the MPU 52 is different from the first embodiment in that the processes of steps S2414K to S2417K are executed instead of the processes of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414K, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the special game start command has been received.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2414K that the special game start command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2416K.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the special game start command has been received in step S2414K, the MPU 52 executes the special game start effect determination process in step S2415K. In the process of determining the special game start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the special game start effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. This special game start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the special game has started. In this embodiment, the special game start effect is the same as the rotation distribution start effect in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

Further, the MPU 52 sets a special game start effect command related to the special game start effect determined in the process of determining the special game start effect in step S2415K. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special game start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special game start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special game start effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the special game start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2415K, or when it is determined in step S2414K that the special game start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K whether or not the special game stop command has been received. To do.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K that the special game stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes after step S2418I.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the special game stop command has been received in step S2416K, the MPU 52 executes the determination process of the special game stop effect in step S2417K. In the process of determining the special game stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the special game stop effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 53. This special game stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the special game has been stopped. In the present embodiment, the special game stop effect is the same as the rotation distribution stop effect in the first embodiment.

Further, the MPU 52 executes the light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and the voice control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

Further, the MPU 52 sets a special game stop effect command related to the special game stop effect determined in the process of determining the special game stop effect in step S2417K. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special game stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special game stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special game stop effect command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores the image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 executes the special game stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the voice emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2417K, or when it is determined in step S2416K that the special game stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2418I and subsequent steps as in the first embodiment. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 87K functions as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the right-handed route to either the special game payout means or the entry delay means.

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotary distribution means 87K that distributes a game ball flowing down a right-handed route to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means. , The game is played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotary distribution means 87K. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the rotary distribution means 87K is adopted as the special distribution means, but if the game ball flowing down the right-handed route can be distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. , Any configuration may be adopted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary distribution means 87K, and then the variable winning through gate. As a specific profit-giving means for giving a profit to the player based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 87K before the game ball enters the 85. It is functioning.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this way, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters. Anything can be used as long as a game ball flowing down the game area can be inserted. Further, the specific profit-giving means does not have to be the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 that pay out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area, and if the player can be given a profit, Information useful to the player may be given, a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 can be promoted advantageously may be given, or anything may be given.

According to such a configuration, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute the game balls flowing down the game area by the rotary distribution means 87K to the variable winning through gate 85, and then the variable winning through gate. Before the game ball enters the 85, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 87K. You can enjoy the benefits given by the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions / effects as (1) to (5) and (9) in the first embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained. ..
(19) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotary distribution means 87K that distributes a game ball flowing down a right-handed route to either a special game payout means or a ball entry delay means, the player can use the rotary distribution means. At 87K, the game will be played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(20) In the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84, the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to the variable winning through gate 85 by the rotary distribution means 87K, and then the game balls are transferred to the variable winning through gate 85. Before entering the ball, the player is given a profit based on the game ball distributed to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 87K, so that the player can use the open start port 83 and the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84. You can enjoy the benefits given by the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts already described will be designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view of the game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 2 includes a lower operating port 26, a variable winning device 27I, and a through gate 31I.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that it includes an operation winning device 26L, a variable winning device 27L, and a through gate 31L. different. Further, the game board 2 is different from the first embodiment in that the game board 2 is provided with an equivalent winning opening 88L provided at a lower left position of the variable winning through gate 85.

FIG. 102 is an enlarged front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the lower right game means is enlarged. In FIG. 102, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes orthogonal to the Z-axis are described as the X and Y axes. The same applies to the following drawings.
The operation winning device 26L is provided adjacent to the left side of the variable winning device 27L. The operation winning device 26L drives an operation port 261L that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 262L for opening / closing the operating port 261L, and an opening / closing door 262L. It is equipped with a winning drive unit 263L.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the firing handle 16, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the operation winning device 26L while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

Here, the operation winning device 26L has the same configuration as the lower operation port 26 in the first embodiment except for its form and position, and has the same function.
Specifically, the operating port 261L is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The actuating port 261L includes a detection sensor 303 and has the same function as the lower actuating port 26 in the first embodiment. When the pachinko machine 1 enters the operating port 261L, the pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of three prize balls. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the upper operating port 25 and the operating port 261L may be different.

Further, the opening / closing door 262L is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the operating port 261L. The opening / closing door 262L has the same function as the electric accessory 261 in the first embodiment.
Specifically, the opening / closing door 262L is connected to the operation winning drive unit 263L mounted on the back side of the game board 2. The opening / closing door 262L is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the operation winning driving unit 263L. The closed state is a state in which the opening of the operating port 261L is closed by advancing toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2. The open state is a state in which the opening of the operating port 261L is opened by retreating toward the inside of the game board 2 and burying it in the game board 2.

Therefore, the game ball cannot win the operating port 261L when the opening / closing door 262L is set to the closed state, and can win the operating port 261L when the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state.

In addition, the operation winning device 26L has a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the operating port 261L (a state in which a game ball can be entered unlike the closed state) and an operating port instead of the closed state and the open state described above. It may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in 261L. Further, the operation winning device 26L may be configured such that such switching is performed not by setting the opening / closing door 262L but by the displacement of the operating port 261L. In such a configuration, the operating winning device 26L , The opening / closing door 262L may not be provided.

Here, as in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes in which the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state so that the game balls can be won in the operating port 261L at different frequencies. have. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, the frequency of setting the opening / closing door 262L to the open state is relatively low (low frequency guide state) and the frequency of setting the opening / closing door 262L to the open state is relative. Has a high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory open lottery. However, in the high frequency support mode, the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state more often when the electric service open state is won, and the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state as compared with the low frequency support mode. The opening time of the times is also long. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening / closing door 262L in the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service open state is shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the minimum waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 35) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win the operating port 261L as compared with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player strikes the launch handle 16 to the left with a medium amount of rotation, and the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed at the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side of the side portion to the central portion, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the upper operating port 25 rather than the operating port 261L. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the player strikes right with the maximum amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is set on the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the operating port 261L rather than the upper operating port 25.
Then, when a prize is detected in the operating port 261L, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of game balls so much. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 25, and is less likely to cause the game ball to enter the operating port 261L (first left-handed route). Route) and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the operating port 261L and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the upper operating port 25.

The configuration of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing times may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected securing times may be set. May be configured to be shorter. Furthermore, by combining the number of times the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time conditions, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency with which the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state with the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high.

The variable winning device 27L has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27I in the first embodiment except for its size. Specifically, the variable winning device 27L opens and closes a large winning opening 271 that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an opening / closing door 272 for opening / closing the large winning opening 271. It is provided with a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the door 272.
The player hits the right with the maximum amount of rotation of the firing handle 16, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side of the side portion, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 27L while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

The through gate 31L has the same configuration as the through gate 31I in the first embodiment except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31L includes a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 103) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 306 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize balls when the balls enter the through gates 31 and 31L, unlike the case where the balls enter the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is discharged not only from the game area after passing through the opening but also from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the flow of the game area is continued without flow. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out ports 28 and 281, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gates 31 and 31L and the variable winning through gate 85 means that the ball continues to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. .. The ball entry into the through gates 31 and 31L and the variable winning through gate 85 is also referred to as winning in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

The equivalent winning opening 88L is provided in the area on the left side of the variable winning device 27L. The equivalent winning opening 88L includes a detection sensor 310L (see FIG. 103) that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 310L is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 executes a predetermined number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection result of the detection sensor 310L. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 executes the payout of one prize ball when the ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. The detection sensor 310L may be any type as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Further, the game board 2 has a nail NL5L group planted on the left side of the equivalent winning opening 88L. This nail NL5L group is planted so that all the game balls that have moved to the left on the plate surface of the opening / closing door 272 are put into the equivalent winning opening 88L.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machines>
FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 103, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a voice emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a payout control device 46 and a power supply / launch control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control for causing the payout device 48 described above to pay out the game ball. The power supply / launch control device 47 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 constituting the MPU 42. Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 43 and the RAM 44.
In the present embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 42, but they may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 4.

The MPU 42 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 45 provided in the main control device 4 and a plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, 310L. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 45, the payout control device 46, and the voice emission control device 5. Further, the output port of the MPU 42 includes an operation winning drive unit 263L that opens and closes the opening / closing door 262L of the operating winning device 26L, a variable winning driving unit 273 that opens / closes the opening / closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27L, and an open winning device 84. It is connected to an open winning drive unit 843 that opens and closes the opening / closing door 842, a main display unit 34, and an accessory display unit 35.

The main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the operation winning drive unit 263L to open and close the operation port 261L. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to open / close the large winning opening 271. Further, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning drive unit 843 to open and close the open winning opening 841. Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the main display unit 34 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each operating port 25,261L. Further, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 35 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gates 31 and 31L.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply / launch control device 47 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 47. .. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, 310L include various winning openings and out openings of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the operating opening 261L, the variable winning device 27L, the open winning device 84, and the equivalent winning opening 88L. It is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with 28, 281, each through gate 31, 31L, an open starting port 83, and a variable winning through gate 85. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, 307I to 309I, 310L, the MPU 42 includes various winning openings, out openings 28, 281, through gates 31, 31L, open starting openings 83, and variable winning openings. The winning determination (ball entry determination) for the through gate 85 is performed. The MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination of the upper operating port 25 or the operating port 261L.

In the present embodiment, the main control device 4 executes a process different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the normal treatment is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the normal processing in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301-S314 as shown in FIG. 104. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 is different from the first embodiment in that the process of step S306L is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306L, the MPU 42 executes the electric service support process for executing the drive control of the opening / closing door 262L provided in the operation winning device 26L. In this electric service support process, the MPU 42 executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and also performs the electric accessory opening lottery. If it is won, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 262L is executed. Further, the MPU 42 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an opening amount of the opening / closing door of the operation winning device. Specifically, FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation winning device 26L as viewed from the vertically upper side. FIG. 105 (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing door 262L is set to the closed state, and FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing door 262L is set to the fully open open state. FIG. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing door 262L is set to the half-open open state.

If the opening / closing door 262L of the operating winning device 26L is not won in the electric accessory opening lottery, it is driven by the operating winning driving unit 263L as shown in FIG. 105 (A) to be closed. Set. When the opening / closing door 262L is set to the closed state, the game ball passes over the opening / closing door 262L, so that the operating opening 261L cannot win a prize.

Here, in step S306L, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 42 sets the opening amount when setting the opening / closing door 262L to the open state to fully open. When the opening / closing door 262L of the operating winning device 26L is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the opening / closing door 262L is driven by the operating winning driving unit 263L to be fully opened. Set. When the opening / closing door 262L is set to the fully open open state, the game ball can win a prize in the operating port 261L.

On the other hand, the MPU 42 opens when the opening / closing door 262L is set to the open state when it is determined that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (when the winning / failing lottery mode is determined to be the low probability mode). Set the amount to half open. When the opening / closing door 262L of the operating winning device 26L is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the opening / closing door 262L is driven by the operating winning driving unit 263L to be in a half-open open state. Set. When the opening / closing door 262L is set to the half-open open state, the game ball passes over the opening / closing door 262L, so that the operating opening 261L cannot win a prize.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 gives the player the first benefit of starting the game in the specific controlled state when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball. The flow path in the Kroon-guided state functions as the next ball entry area, and functions as the primary flow path that enables the game ball to enter the primary ball entry area.
Further, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 have a secondary benefit (from the first benefit) that when a ball is entered into the open winning opening 841, 15 prize balls are paid out. It functions as a secondary ball entry area that gives the player a small profit), and the flow path in the starting port guided state allows the game ball to enter the secondary ball entry area. It functions as a flow path for.
Further, the equivalent winning opening 88L has a third profit (a profit smaller than the second profit) of executing the payout of one prize ball when a ball is entered into the equivalent winning opening 88L. Functions as a third-order ball entry area for giving the player a ball, and the flow path in the normal guided state functions as a third-order flow path that allows the game ball to enter the third ball entry area. doing.
Then, the rotary distribution means 82 is placed in an operating state (specific guidance state) that allows the game ball to flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and in the third flow path. It has a non-operating state (normally guided state) that allows the game ball to flow down, and functions as an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (start of a special game). ..

According to such a configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific guided state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the Kroon-guided flow path or the start port-guided flow path, and the normal-guided flow path. Since it has a normal guidance state that allows the game ball to flow down, and is provided with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal guidance state to a specific guidance state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the player is special. Based on the start of the game, the game is played with the expectation that the normal guidance state will be changed to the specific guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L can give one or less game balls when one game ball is entered.

According to such a configuration, the equivalent winning opening 88L can give one or less game balls when one game ball is entered, so that the player can specifically guide the rotary distribution means 82. In the state, the game ball is fired at the rotary distribution means 82, and in the normal guidance state of the rotary distribution means 82, the game ball is not fired at the rotary distribution means 82. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L executes the payout of one winning ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. On the other hand, in the third entry area, for example, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to pay out the prize balls when the game ball is entered, and if this lottery is won, one prize ball is obtained. You may want to make a payout of. Further, in the third entry area, for example, a winning opening for paying out one prize ball and an out opening for not paying out the prize ball are arranged side by side, and a game ball is provided in either of these. It may be provided with a switch for switching the ball to enter. In short, in the third entry area, it is sufficient that one or less game balls can be given at the time of entry of one game ball.

Here, in the present embodiment, the flow path in the normal guided state allows the game ball to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L in the predetermined game state (when it is determined that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode). There is.

According to such a configuration, the flow path in the normal guided state allows the game ball to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L in the predetermined gaming state, so that the player can rotate the ball in the predetermined gaming state. In the normal guidance state of the minute means 82, the game ball is not launched aiming at the flow path in the normal guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the player from illegally gaining profit in a predetermined gaming state (normal gaming state) even when the gaming ball is launched toward the right-handed route. Can be done.

According to such an embodiment, in addition to being able to exert the same actions and effects as those of (1) to (14) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(21) Since the equivalent winning opening 88L can give one or less game balls when one game ball is entered, the player can perform rotary vibration in the specific guidance state of the rotary distribution means 82. The game ball is fired at the distribution means 82, and in the normal guidance state of the rotation distribution means 82, the game ball is not fired at the rotation distribution means 82. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(22) Since the flow path in the normal guidance state allows the game ball to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L in the predetermined game state, the player can normally enter the rotary distribution means 82 in the predetermined game state. In the guided state, the game ball will not be launched aiming at the flow path in the normally guided state. Therefore, in the predetermined gaming state, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player from illegally gaining profit even when the gaming ball is launched toward the right-handed route.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment and each reference embodiment]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments and reference embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the embodiments and the reference embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the embodiments and the reference embodiments. However, modifications, improvements, etc. within the range in which the object of the features of the present invention group can be achieved, and combinations of each feature are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) to be executed, and variable display means (symbol display device 36) for executing variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including the effect executing means (voice emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
Based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the first effect means (preliminary advance effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect (look-ahead effect) for a predetermined period, and
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special) that overlaps with the first effect and differs from the first effect in the variable display means during the predetermined period. It is equipped with a second effect means (special hold effect determination process) that executes the effect for digestion of hold.
The first effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the end of the second effect, the first effect is continuously executed.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the second effect means overlaps with the first effect in the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of the second trigger different from the first trigger. A second effect different from the first effect is executed, and the first effect means continuously executes the first effect after the end of the second effect. According to this, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in the state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. It is possible to continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group
When the second effect means causes the variation display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variation display means to interrupt the first effect, and the second effect means causes the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means terminates the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, when the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the variable display means interrupts the first effect and the second effect. When the variable display means terminates the second effect by the means, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so that the first effect is interrupted even when the first effect is being executed. The second effect can be executed, and the first effect can be restarted after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group
The first effect means is a game characterized in that the first effect is continuously executed during an overlapping period in which the variable display means is caused the variable display means to execute the second effect by the second effect means. Machine.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , The first effect can be continuously executed regardless of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first production.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The effect executing means is
The variation is caused by storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit as the first trigger. The first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect, and
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second effect is used as the second effect layer (second effect layer) having a higher priority than the first effect layer. The second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing the data in the two layers L2).
An image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority is provided.
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the image synthesizing means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in the order of priority. , The second effect means on the first effect layer that stores the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion by the first effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second effect layer that stores the data related to the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start is performed. Even in the state where the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section is being executed, the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section is overwritten. The first effect means can continue the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer after the end of the second effect. Can be executed.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A4 of the present invention group,
The effect executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) that stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means, and
It is provided with an information storage means (hold decision processing) for storing the hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the start ball entry means.
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means, and
A plurality of hold areas (first sub-side hold area SRa and second sub-side hold area SRb) for storing hold information in the hold state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means are provided.
The information storage means is
With the first hold storage means (process of step S2202) for storing the hold information in the first hold area (first sub-side hold area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion. ,
A second hold storage for storing hold information in a second hold area (second sub-side hold area SRb) different from the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry section. Means (process of step S2203) and
It is provided with a hold shift means (hold shift process) for shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area and the second hold area toward the execution area.
The holding shift means is a gaming machine characterized in that the holding information stored in the second holding area is preferentially shifted toward the execution area.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball to the first start ball entry portion can be moved. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section, even in the state where the first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is executed based on the entry of the ball. , The second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A5 of the present invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first holding area that is digested before the holding information when the holding information is stored in the first holding area by the first holding storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the degree of expectation of the hold information by using the effect based on the hold information.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the hold information stored in the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion. In the state where the first effect based on the above is being executed, the second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion. If this is done, the continuity of the first production will be impaired. According to the present invention, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. This is possible, and after the end of the second effect, the first effect can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A5 or the feature A6 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to store the reserved pattern. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A5 or the feature A6 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means is characterized in that the variable display means displays the reserved pattern by storing data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. Game machine.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. , When the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. In addition, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved pattern on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A8 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means ends the second effect so as to fade out.

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, the second effect means ends the variable display means so as to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort. Can be done.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A9 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means causes the variation display means to execute the first effect, and then the variation display means terminates the second effect. ..

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect by the first effect means, and then causes the variable display means to finish the second effect. It is possible to end the second production and execute the first production without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A8 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable display means immediately terminates the second effect collectively.

According to the feature A11 of the present invention group, since the second effect means immediately terminates the second effect collectively in the variable display means, the second effect can be terminated quickly.

According to the feature A group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine executes a plurality of kinds of effects that make the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, since the plurality of types of effects are randomly executed in order to simplify the control of the game machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to play the game comfortably.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) to be executed, and variable display means (symbol display device 36) for executing variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including the effect executing means (voice emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
By storing data related to a specific effect (pre-reading effect and special hold digestion effect) in the specific effect layer (second layer L2 and third layer L3) based on the establishment of a specific opportunity, the above Specific effect means (preliminary hold effect determination process and special hold effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute the specific effect, and
By storing data related to a common image different from the specific effect in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the specific effect layer, the common image is stored in the variable display means. Information notification means to be displayed (holding generation processing) and
A gaming machine including an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) that causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the specific effect layer in the order of priority.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the information notification means is a variable display means by storing data related to a common image different from the specific effect in a common layer having a higher priority than the specific effect layer. Since a common image is displayed on the variable display means, it is possible to reliably display the common image on the variable display means without overwriting the common image displayed on the variable display means when executing a specific effect. ..

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) that stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means, and
Information storage means (holding decision processing) for storing hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the starting ball entry means.
A gaming machine including the information notifying means for displaying a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information on the variable display means as the common image based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means. ..

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in the common layer having a higher priority than the specific effect layer. , When a specific effect is executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2 of the present invention group
The specific production means
Based on the establishment of the first trigger as the specific trigger, the first effect means (preliminary hold effect determination) for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect (look-ahead effect) as the specific effect for a predetermined period. Processing) and
Based on the establishment of the second trigger as the specific trigger different from the first trigger, the variation display means overlaps with the first effect during the predetermined period and differs from the first effect. It is provided with a second effect means (special hold effect determination process) for executing the second effect (effect for digestion of special hold) as the specific effect.
The first effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the end of the second effect, the first effect is continuously executed.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the second effect means overlaps with the first effect in the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of the second trigger different from the first trigger. A second effect different from the first effect is executed, and the first effect means continuously executes the first effect after the end of the second effect. According to this, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in the state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. It is possible to continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
When the second effect means causes the variation display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variation display means to interrupt the first effect, and the second effect means causes the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means terminates the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, when the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the variable display means interrupts the first effect and the second effect. When the variable display means terminates the second effect by the means, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so that the first effect is interrupted even when the first effect is being executed. The second effect can be executed, and the first effect can be restarted after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The first effect means is a game characterized in that the first effect is continuously executed during an overlapping period in which the variable display means is caused the variable display means to execute the second effect by the second effect means. Machine.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , The first effect can be continuously executed regardless of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first production.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B3 to B5 of the present invention group.
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The specific production means
With the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry portion as the first trigger, the data related to the first effect is transferred to the first effect layer (third layer L3) as the specific effect layer. The first effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect by storing the first effect.
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second effect is used as the specific effect layer having a higher priority than the first effect layer. The variable display means is provided with the second effect means for executing the second effect by storing the data in the second effect layer (second layer L2).
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the image synthesizing means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in the order of priority. , The second effect means on the first effect layer that stores the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion by the first effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second effect layer that stores the data related to the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start is performed. Even in the state where the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section is being executed, the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section is overwritten. The first effect means can continue the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer after the end of the second effect. Can be executed.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B6 of the present invention group,
The effect executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) that stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means, and
It is provided with an information storage means (hold decision processing) for storing the hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the start ball entry means.
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means, and
A plurality of hold areas (first sub-side hold area SRa and second sub-side hold area SRb) for storing hold information in the hold state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means are provided.
The information storage means is
With the first hold storage means (process of step S2202) for storing the hold information in the first hold area (first sub-side hold area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion. ,
A second hold storage for storing hold information in a second hold area (second sub-side hold area SRb) different from the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry section. Means (process of step S2203) and
It is provided with a hold shift means (hold shift process) for shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area and the second hold area toward the execution area.
The holding shift means is a gaming machine characterized in that the holding information stored in the second holding area is preferentially shifted toward the execution area.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball to the first start ball entry portion can be moved. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section, even in the state where the first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is executed based on the entry of the ball. , The second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B7 of the present invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first holding area that is digested before the holding information when the holding information is stored in the first holding area by the first holding storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the degree of expectation of the hold information by using the effect based on the hold information.

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the hold information stored in the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion. In the state where the first effect based on the above is being executed, the second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion. If this is done, the continuity of the first production will be impaired. According to the present invention, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. This is possible, and after the end of the second effect, the first effect can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B3 to B8 of the present invention group.
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means ends the second effect so as to fade out.

According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the second effect means ends the variable display means so as to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort. Can be done.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B9 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means causes the variation display means to execute the first effect, and then the variation display means terminates the second effect. ..

According to the feature B10 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect by the first effect means, and then causes the variable display means to finish the second effect. It is possible to end the second production and execute the first production without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B3 to B8 of the present invention group.
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable display means immediately terminates the second effect collectively.

According to the feature B11 of the present invention group, since the second effect means immediately terminates the second effect collectively in the variable display means, the second effect can be terminated quickly.

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine stores the hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the operating port, and is associated with the hold information based on the hold information stored in the information storage means. A common image such as a reserved pattern is displayed on the variable display means. In addition, the gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will shift to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, since multiple types of effects are randomly executed in order to simplify the control of the game machine, it may affect the common image displayed on the variable display means, which is comfortable for the player. There is a problem that it may not be possible to play a game.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) to be executed, and variable display means (symbol display device 36) for executing variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including the effect executing means (voice emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
Based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the first effect means (preliminary advance effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect (look-ahead effect) for a predetermined period, and
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special) that overlaps with the first effect and differs from the first effect in the variable display means during the predetermined period. It is equipped with a second effect means (special hold effect determination process) that executes the effect for digestion of hold.
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means ends the second effect so as to fade out.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the second effect means overlaps with the first effect in the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of the second trigger different from the first trigger. A second effect different from the first effect is executed. Then, since the second effect means ends the variable display means so as to fade out the second effect, the second effect can be ended without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means causes the variation display means to execute the first effect, and then the variation display means terminates the second effect. ..

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect by the first effect means, and then causes the variable display means to finish the second effect. It is possible to end the second production and execute the first production without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature C3.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) to be executed, and variable display means (symbol display device 36) for executing variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including the effect executing means (voice emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
Based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the first effect means (preliminary advance effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect (look-ahead effect) for a predetermined period, and
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special) that overlaps with the first effect and differs from the first effect in the variable display means during the predetermined period. It is equipped with a second effect means (special hold effect determination process) that executes the effect for digestion of hold.
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable display means immediately terminates the second effect collectively.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the second effect means overlaps with the first effect in the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of the second trigger different from the first trigger. A second effect different from the first effect is executed. Then, since the second effect means immediately terminates the second effect collectively in the variable display means, the second effect can be terminated quickly.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C3 of the present invention group,
The first effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the end of the second effect, the first effect is continuously executed.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect after the end of the second effect. According to this, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in the state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. It is possible to continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C4 of the present invention group,
When the second effect means causes the variation display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variation display means to interrupt the first effect, and the second effect means causes the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means terminates the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, when the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the variable display means interrupts the first effect and the second effect. When the variable display means terminates the second effect by the means, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so that the first effect is interrupted even when the first effect is being executed. The second effect can be executed, and the first effect can be restarted after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C4 of the present invention group,
The first effect means is a game characterized in that the first effect is continuously executed during an overlapping period in which the variable display means is caused the variable display means to execute the second effect by the second effect means. Machine.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , The first effect can be continuously executed regardless of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first production.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C4 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The effect executing means is
The variation is caused by storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit as the first trigger. The first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect, and
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second effect is used as the second effect layer (second effect layer) having a higher priority than the first effect layer. The second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing the data in the two layers L2).
An image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority is provided.
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the image synthesizing means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in the order of priority. , The second effect means on the first effect layer that stores the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion by the first effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second effect layer that stores the data related to the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start is performed. Even in the state where the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section is being executed, the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section is overwritten. The first effect means can continue the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer after the end of the second effect. Can be executed.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C7 of the present invention group,
The effect executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) that stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means, and
It is provided with an information storage means (hold decision processing) for storing the hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the start ball entry means.
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means, and
A plurality of hold areas (first sub-side hold area SRa and second sub-side hold area SRb) for storing hold information in the hold state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means are provided.
The information storage means is
With the first hold storage means (process of step S2202) for storing the hold information in the first hold area (first sub-side hold area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion. ,
A second hold storage for storing hold information in a second hold area (second sub-side hold area SRb) different from the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry section. Means (process of step S2203) and
It is provided with a hold shift means (hold shift process) for shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area and the second hold area toward the execution area.
The holding shift means is a gaming machine characterized in that the holding information stored in the second holding area is preferentially shifted toward the execution area.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball to the first start ball entry portion can be moved. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section, even in the state where the first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is executed based on the entry of the ball. , The second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C8 of the present invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first holding area that is digested before the holding information when the holding information is stored in the first holding area by the first holding storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the degree of expectation of the hold information by using the effect based on the hold information.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the hold information stored in the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion. In the state where the first effect based on the above is being executed, the second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion. If this is done, the continuity of the first production will be impaired. According to the present invention, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. This is possible, and after the end of the second effect, the first effect can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to store the reserved pattern. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means is characterized in that the variable display means displays the reserved pattern by storing data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. Game machine.

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. , When the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. In addition, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved pattern on the variable display means without using a new layer.

According to the feature C group of the present invention as described above, since the player can comfortably play the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine executes a plurality of kinds of effects that make the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, since the plurality of types of effects are randomly executed in order to simplify the control of the game machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to play the game comfortably.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) to be executed, and variable display means (symbol display device 36) for executing variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including the effect executing means (voice emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
Based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the first effect means (preliminary advance effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect (look-ahead effect) for a predetermined period, and
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special) that overlaps with the first effect and differs from the first effect in the variable display means during the predetermined period. It is equipped with a second effect means (special hold effect determination process) that executes the effect for digestion of hold.
The second effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is more useful to the player than the first effect.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the second effect means overlaps with the first effect in the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of the second trigger different from the first trigger. A second effect different from the first effect is executed. Then, since the second effect is more useful to the player than the first effect, the player pays attention to whether or not the second effect is executed during the predetermined period. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The first effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the end of the second effect, the first effect is continuously executed.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect after the end of the second effect. According to this, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in the state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. It is possible to continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
When the second effect means causes the variation display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variation display means to interrupt the first effect, and the second effect means causes the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means terminates the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, when the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the variable display means interrupts the first effect and the second effect. When the variable display means terminates the second effect by the means, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so that the first effect is interrupted even when the first effect is being executed. The second effect can be executed, and the first effect can be restarted after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The first effect means is a game characterized in that the first effect is continuously executed during an overlapping period in which the variable display means is caused the variable display means to execute the second effect by the second effect means. Machine.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , The first effect can be continuously executed regardless of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first production.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D2 to D4 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The effect executing means is
The variation is caused by storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit as the first trigger. The first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect, and
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second effect is used as the second effect layer (second effect layer) having a higher priority than the first effect layer. The second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing the data in the two layers L2).
An image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority is provided.
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the image synthesizing means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in the order of priority. , The second effect means on the first effect layer that stores the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion by the first effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second effect layer that stores the data related to the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start is performed. Even in the state where the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section is being executed, the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section is overwritten. The first effect means can continue the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer after the end of the second effect. Can be executed.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D5 of the present invention group,
The effect executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) that stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means, and
It is provided with an information storage means (hold decision processing) for storing the hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the start ball entry means.
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means, and
A plurality of hold areas (first sub-side hold area SRa and second sub-side hold area SRb) for storing hold information in the hold state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means are provided.
The information storage means is
With the first hold storage means (process of step S2202) for storing the hold information in the first hold area (first sub-side hold area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion. ,
A second hold storage for storing hold information in a second hold area (second sub-side hold area SRb) different from the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry section. Means (process of step S2203) and
It is provided with a hold shift means (hold shift process) for shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area and the second hold area toward the execution area.
The holding shift means is a gaming machine characterized in that the holding information stored in the second holding area is preferentially shifted toward the execution area.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball to the first start ball entry portion can be moved. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section, even in the state where the first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is executed based on the entry of the ball. , The second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D6 of the present invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first holding area that is digested before the holding information when the holding information is stored in the first holding area by the first holding storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the degree of expectation of the hold information by using the effect based on the hold information.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, since the first effect is the look-ahead effect, the hold information stored in the first hold area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion. In the state where the first effect based on the above is being executed, the second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion. If this is done, the continuity of the first production will be impaired. According to the present invention, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. This is possible, and after the end of the second effect, the first effect can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to store the reserved pattern. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means is characterized in that the variable display means displays the reserved pattern by storing data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. Game machine.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. , When the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. In addition, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved pattern on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D2 to D9 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means ends the second effect so as to fade out.

According to the feature D10 of the present invention group, the second effect means ends the variable display means so as to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort. Can be done.

Feature D11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D10 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means causes the variation display means to execute the first effect, and then the variation display means terminates the second effect. ..

According to the feature D11 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect by the first effect means, and then causes the variable display means to finish the second effect. It is possible to end the second production and execute the first production without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature D12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D2 to D9 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable display means immediately terminates the second effect collectively.

According to the feature D12 of the present invention group, since the second effect means immediately terminates the second effect collectively in the variable display means, the second effect can be terminated quickly.

According to the feature D group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine executes a plurality of kinds of effects that make the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, since the plurality of types of effects are randomly executed in order to simplify the control of the game machine, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are inserted, and an internal lottery is held when the game ball is entered. Starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and lower operating port 26) to be executed, and variable display means (symbol display device 36) for executing variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including the effect executing means (voice emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute the effect.
The effect executing means is
Based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the variable display means is provided with a first effect means (preliminary advance effect determination process) for executing a first effect (look-ahead effect) having a plurality of expectations for the variable display means.
The game machine
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (for digestion of special hold) that overlaps with the first effect and differs from the first effect during the predetermined period. Equipped with a second production means (special hold production determination processing) to execute the production)
The first effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the expectation level of the first effect is changed during an overlapping period in which the second effect is executed by the second effect means.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the second production means overlaps with the first production during a predetermined period based on the establishment of the second trigger different from the first trigger. A different second effect is executed, and the first effect means changes the expectation level of the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect is executed by the second effect means. According to this, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in the state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. It is possible to change the degree of expectation of the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect is executed by the second effect means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
Based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, a second effect (special) that overlaps with the first effect and differs from the first effect in the variable display means during the predetermined period. The second effect means (special hold effect determination process) for executing the effect for digestion of the hold is provided.
The first effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the end of the second effect, the first effect is continuously executed.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect after the end of the second effect. According to this, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even in the state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. It is possible to continue to execute the first effect after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group
When the second effect means causes the variation display means to execute the second effect, the first effect means causes the variation display means to interrupt the first effect, and the second effect means causes the first effect. A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means terminates the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, when the first effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, the variable display means interrupts the first effect and the second effect. When the variable display means terminates the second effect by the means, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so that the first effect is interrupted even when the first effect is being executed. The second effect can be executed, and the first effect can be restarted after the end of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can surely entertain the player with the first effect.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E2 of the present invention group
The first effect means is a game characterized in that the first effect is continuously executed during an overlapping period in which the variable display means is caused the variable display means to execute the second effect by the second effect means. Machine.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the first effect means continuously executes the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect. , The first effect can be continuously executed regardless of the second effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can entertain the player with the flow of the first production.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E2 to E4 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means
The first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25) and
It is provided with a second starting ball entering portion (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entering portion.
The effect executing means is
The variation is caused by storing the data related to the first effect in the first effect layer (third layer L3) with the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry unit as the first trigger. The first effect means for causing the display means to execute the first effect, and
With the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry portion as the second trigger, the data related to the second effect is used as the second effect layer (second effect layer) having a higher priority than the first effect layer. The second effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing the data in the two layers L2).
An image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority is provided.
The second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A featured gaming machine.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the image synthesizing means causes the variable display means to display an image by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in the order of priority. , The second effect means on the first effect layer that stores the data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion by the first effect means. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing the second effect layer that stores the data related to the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry unit. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start is performed. Even in the state where the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the entry section is being executed, the second effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section is overwritten. The first effect means can continue the first effect by erasing the data related to the second effect stored in the second effect layer after the end of the second effect. Can be executed.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E5 of the present invention group,
The effect executing means is
Information storage means (sub-side hold information storage area 543) that stores a plurality of hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means, and
It is provided with an information storage means (hold decision processing) for storing the hold information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the start ball entry means.
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means, and
A plurality of hold areas (first sub-side hold area SRa and second sub-side hold area SRb) for storing hold information in the hold state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means are provided.
The information storage means is
With the first hold storage means (process of step S2202) for storing the hold information in the first hold area (first sub-side hold area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry portion. ,
A second hold storage for storing hold information in a second hold area (second sub-side hold area SRb) different from the first hold area based on the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry section. Means (process of step S2203) and
It is provided with a hold shift means (hold shift process) for shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area and the second hold area toward the execution area.
The holding shift means is a gaming machine characterized in that the holding information stored in the second holding area is preferentially shifted toward the execution area.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball to the first start ball entry portion can be moved. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry section, even in the state where the first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is executed based on the entry of the ball. , The second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E6 of the present invention group,
The first effect is stored in the first holding area that is digested before the holding information when the holding information is stored in the first holding area by the first holding storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the degree of expectation of the hold information by using the effect based on the hold information.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, the hold information stored in the first hold area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first start entry portion. In the state where the first effect based on the above is being executed, the second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entry portion. If this is done, the continuity of the first production will be impaired. According to the present invention, based on the establishment of the first opportunity, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute the second effect even in a state where the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period. This is possible, and after the end of the second effect, the first effect can be continuously executed, so that the player can comfortably play the game without impairing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means stores the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to store the reserved pattern. A game machine characterized by displaying.

According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in the reserved pattern layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 of the present invention group
The effect executing means is
An information notification means (holding generation processing) for causing the variable display means to display a holding pattern associated with the holding information based on the holding information stored in the information storage means.
The information notification means is characterized in that the variable display means displays the reserved pattern by storing data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. Game machine.

According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the reserved pattern by storing the data related to the reserved pattern in both the first effect layer and the second effect layer. , When the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved pattern can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved pattern displayed on the variable display means. In addition, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved pattern on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E2 to E9 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means ends the second effect so as to fade out.

According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, the second effect means ends the variable display means so as to fade out the second effect, so that the second effect can be ended without causing the player to feel a sense of discomfort. Can be done.

Feature E11.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E10 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation display means causes the variation display means to execute the first effect, and then the variation display means terminates the second effect. ..

According to the feature E11 of the present invention group, the second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the first effect by the first effect means, and then causes the variable display means to finish the second effect. It is possible to end the second production and execute the first production without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature E12.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E2 to E9 of the present invention group,
The second effect means is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable display means immediately terminates the second effect collectively.

According to the feature E12 of the present invention group, since the second effect means immediately terminates the second effect collectively in the variable display means, the second effect can be terminated quickly.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine executes a plurality of kinds of effects that make the player expect that the game state will be shifted to the specific control state after the variable display of the pattern is started.

However, since the plurality of types of effects are randomly executed in order to simplify the control of the game machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to play the game comfortably.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1.
It has a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, and a rolling surface for rolling the game ball flowing down the game area. Stages (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) in which the game balls are temporarily rolled and dropped, and ball entry means (upper operating port 25) capable of entering the game balls dropped from the stage. It is a game machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with
The stage
Guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the stage (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F),
When at least one game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means, the blocking means for preventing the subsequent gaming ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means ( A gaming machine characterized by having a second plate 783).

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, when the blocking means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means, the guiding means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the stage. Since it is prevented from being guided to the stage, the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the stage without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The stage
The first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) and
It is provided with a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage.
The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the first stage.
By guiding the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 76) of the second stage, the blocking means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage by the guiding means. A game machine characterized by preventing it from playing.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the second stage. Since the guiding means prevents the succeeding game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the first stage, the player guides the succeeding game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage by the blocking means. Even when this is prevented, the movement of the subsequent game ball guided to the rolling surface of the second stage can be enjoyed.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F2 of the present invention group,
The first stage is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an advantageous stage for a player as compared with the second stage.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the guiding means rolls on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by the subsequent game balls. Since the first stage is an advantageous stage for the player as compared with the second stage, the player can feel at ease about the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface of the first stage. You can enjoy it.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features F1 to F3 of the present invention group.
The blocking means
A blocking state that prevents the following gaming ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means.
It has a non-blocking state that does not prevent the subsequent gaming ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means.
The stage
A switching means (stage distribution mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state is provided.
The switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that when at least one game ball is guided to a rolling surface of the stage by the guiding means, the blocking means is switched to a blocking state.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the stage includes a switching means for switching the blocking means into either a blocking state or a non-blocking state, and the switching means rolls at least one game ball by the guiding means. When guided to the moving surface, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, so that the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the blocking means is switched to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, so that the player can use the guiding means. You can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the stage.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F4 of the present invention group,
The switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the blocking means is switched to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the succeeding game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, so that the player Can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F6 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means is provided.
The contact means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with a part of subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting with a succeeding game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means. Since the contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with a part of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means, the player can use the guiding means to perform the stage. Attention will be paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided by the contact means with the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F6 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means is provided.
The contact means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guidance means.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means for switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting with a succeeding game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means. Since the contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means, the player can move the contact means to the rolling surface of the stage. You can enjoy the guided movement of the game ball with peace of mind.

According to the feature F group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
Further, the game machine is provided with a stage in which the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily rolled and dropped, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball dropped from this stage to enter the ball.

However, when the succeeding game ball comes into contact with the game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move unfavorably to the player. There is a problem that the player cannot play the game comfortably.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1.
It has a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, and a rolling surface for rolling the game ball flowing down the game area. Stages (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) in which the game balls are temporarily rolled and dropped, and ball entry means (upper operating port 25) capable of entering the game balls dropped from the stage. It is a game machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with
The stage
The first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) and
A second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage, and
It has a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first stage and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second stage, and the first stage and the second stage. A stage guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball is provided on any of the stages of the above.
The stage guiding means
A gaming machine including a switching means (stage distribution mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the stage guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state.

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the stage guiding means includes a switching means for switching the stage guiding means between the first guiding state and the second guiding state, and the switching means is limited to the first stage only. Since the player switches to either the first guidance state for guiding the game ball or the second guidance state for guiding the game ball only to the second stage, the player pays attention to the state of the stage guidance means. .. Further, the switching means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means by switching to the second guiding state (first guiding state). In order to prevent this, the game ball guided to the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means is not hindered by the subsequent game ball, and the first stage (second stage). Can roll on the rolling surface of. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The switching means is characterized in that when at least one game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the first stage by the stage guiding means, the stage guiding means is switched to the second guiding state. Game machine.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, when the switching means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage by the stage guiding means, the switching means puts the stage guiding means into the second guiding state. Since the switching is performed, the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by the subsequent game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 of the present invention group,
The first stage is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an advantageous stage for a player as compared with the second stage.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means rolls on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by the subsequent game balls. Since the first stage is an advantageous stage for the player as compared with the second stage, the player can reduce the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage. You can enjoy it with your heart.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 or the feature G3 of the present invention group
The switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the stage guiding means is switched to the first guiding state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. The person can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 or the feature G3 of the present invention group
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the switching means guides the stage guiding means to the first stage by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Since the state is switched, the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G5 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
The contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) that switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting the subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. )
The contact means is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with a part of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guidance guiding means. A game machine to play.

According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the switching means brings the stage guiding means into the first guiding state by coming into contact with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. The contact means is provided at a position where it comes into contact with a part of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G5 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) that switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Prepare,
The contact means is arranged at a position in contact with all the game balls among subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the guidance means. ..

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the switching means brings the stage guiding means into the first guiding state by coming into contact with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Since the contact means is provided at a position where the contact means is in contact with all the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. , The player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage with peace of mind.

According to the feature G group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
Further, the game machine is provided with a stage in which the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily rolled and dropped, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball dropped from this stage to enter the ball.

However, when the succeeding game ball comes into contact with the game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move unfavorably to the player. There is a problem that the player cannot play the game comfortably.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on the front surface of the gaming board, and a flow path (two-stage stages 7, 7E) for flowing the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. It is a game machine (pachinko machine 1) to be equipped.
The flow path is
The first flow path (upper stages 71, 71E) and
A second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path, and
It has a first guiding state that guides the game ball only to the first flow path and a second guiding state that guides the game ball only to the second flow path, and the first flow path and the first flow path. A flow path guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball is provided in any of the second flow paths.
The flow path guiding means
A switching means (stage distribution mechanism 73, 73E, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means between the first guiding state and the second guiding state is provided.
The switching means is a gaming machine characterized by switching to a first guidance state by cooperating with a game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means.

According to the feature H1 of the present invention group, the switching means has a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only in the first flow path and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only in the second flow path. Since the flow path guiding means is switched to any of the above, the player pays attention to the state of the flow path guiding means. Further, since the switching means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means by switching to the second guiding state, the flow path guiding means can be used for the first. The game ball guided to the flow path can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Further, since the switching means switches to the first guidance state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, the player can use the flow path guiding means to switch to the first guidance state. You can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the flow path of 1. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H1 of the present invention group,
The switching means is characterized in that when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, the flow path guiding means is switched to the second guiding state. Game machine.

According to the feature H2 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can roll on the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature H2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine, wherein the first flow path is an advantageous flow path for a player as compared with the second flow path.

According to the feature H3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Since the first flow path is more advantageous to the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the first flow path with peace of mind. be able to.

According to the feature H group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine is provided with a flow path such as a stage where the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily rolled and dropped, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball dropped from this stage to enter. ..

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball that is rolling in a flow path such as a stage, the game ball that is rolling on the stage may move unfavorably to the player. The game machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a flow path (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F,) for flowing the game ball flowing down the game area. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with 7G).
The flow path is
The first flow path (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) and
A second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path, and
It has a first guiding state that guides the game ball only to the first flow path and a second guiding state that guides the game ball only to the second flow path, and the first flow path and the first flow path. A flow path guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball is provided in any of the second flow paths.
The flow path guiding means
A switching means (stage distribution mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means between the first guiding state and the second guiding state is provided.
The switching means switches to a first guided state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Machine.

According to the feature I1 of the present invention group, the switching means has a first guiding state for guiding the game ball only to the first flow path and a second guiding state for guiding the game ball only to the second flow path. Since the flow path guiding means is switched to any of the above, the player pays attention to the state of the flow path guiding means. Further, since the switching means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means by switching to the second guiding state, the flow path guiding means can be used for the first. The game ball guided to the flow path can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Further, since the switching means switches to the first guided state by cooperating with the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, the player can flow. It is possible to further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the road guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I1 of the present invention group
The switching means is characterized in that when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, the flow path guiding means is switched to the second guiding state. Game machine.

According to the feature I2 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when at least one game ball is guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can roll on the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I2 of the present invention group
The switching means is
The contact means (second plate) that switches the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting the flow path guiding means with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path. Equipped with a shape part 786)
The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with a part of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature I3 of the group of the present invention, the switching means first sets the flow path guiding means by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. The contact means is provided at a position where the contact means is in contact with a part of the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Since it is arranged, the player pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature I2 of the present invention group
The switching means is
A contact means (fourth plate) that switches the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. 789G),
The contact means is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. A game machine to play.

According to the feature I4 of the present invention group, the switching means first sets the flow path guiding means by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. The contact means is provided at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls among the subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Since it is provided, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features I2 to I4 of the present invention group.
A gaming machine, wherein the first flow path is an advantageous flow path for a player as compared with the second flow path.

According to the feature I5 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being hindered by the subsequent game ball. The first flow path is more advantageous to the player than the second flow path, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the first flow path with peace of mind. be able to.

According to the feature I group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine is provided with a flow path such as a stage where the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily rolled and dropped, and the starting ball entry means allows the game ball dropped from this stage to enter. ..

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball that is rolling in a flow path such as a stage, the game ball that is rolling on the stage may move unfavorably to the player. The game machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1.
It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) provided with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board.
The first game state and
A second game state different from the first game state, in which only the game balls existing in the specific areas (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can be entered into the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction portion 751). Playing state and
Guidance means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives a profit to the player.
A second game that generates the second gaming state based on the fact that the first gaming ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the first gaming state. The state generating means (first plate 782, 782G and second plate 783) and
When a second game ball launched by the launching means after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the occurrence of the second game state, the first game state is set. The first gaming state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786 or fourth plate 789G) to be generated, and
The second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state. A gaming machine including a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting the number of players.

According to the feature J1 of the present invention group, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the gaming ball existing in the specific region in the gaming region can enter the first entering region, and the guiding means is the player. Since the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area is guided to the second ball entry area that gives the benefit to the player, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, the limiting means causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined area in the gaming area during the generation of the second gaming state. Since this is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J1 of the present invention group,
The limiting means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming ball is passed through a region different from a predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

According to the feature J2 of the present invention group, the limiting means passes the second gaming ball through another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state, and thus the second gaming state generating means. It is possible to surely limit the generation of the second gaming state.

Features J3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature J1 or the feature J2 of the present invention group
The second game state generation means is executed based on the fact that the first game ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second gaming state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to the feature J3 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and when the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state is generated. Since the game state is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features J4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J3 of the present invention group.
The limiting means
A restricted state that restricts the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means, and a restricted state.
It has an unrestricted state that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means.
When the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state, the non-game state is not generated. A game machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to the feature J4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, and the first gaming is performed by the first gaming state generating means. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game without limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means during the generation of the state.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J4 of the present invention group.
The first gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied based on only a part of the second gaming ball that satisfies a predetermined condition.

According to the feature J5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means satisfies a specific condition based only on a part of the second gaming balls satisfying a predetermined condition. The player pays attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features J6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J5 of the present invention group.
The first gaming state is
A first probability state (high frequency disturbing mode) in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and
The second gaming state generating means has a second probability state (low frequency disturbing mode) for generating the second gaming state based on a second probability having a higher probability than the first probability. A featured game machine.

According to the feature J6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state is the first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability, and the first probability. Since the second gaming state generating means has a second probability state for generating the second gaming state based on the second probability having a higher probability than that of the player, the player has a probability state of the second gaming state generating means. Pay attention to, and play with the expectation that it will be in the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J6 of the present invention group.
The second gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means is displaced by the first gaming ball to generate the second gaming state.

According to the feature J7 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the first gaming ball to generate the second gaming state, so that the second gaming state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

Feature J8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features J1 to J7 of the present invention group.
The first gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means is displaced by the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state.

According to the feature J8 of the present invention group, since the first gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state, the first gaming state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

According to the feature J group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which gives the player a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so that the player can play the game. The degree of attention to is increasing.

However, if the game is switched to the first game state without being given a profit during the occurrence of the second game state, the game machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game. ..

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1.
It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) provided with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board.
The first game state and
A second game state different from the first game state, in which only the game balls existing in the specific areas (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can be entered into the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction portion 751). Playing state and
Guidance means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives a profit to the player.
A second game that generates the second gaming state based on the fact that the first gaming ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the first gaming state. The state generating means (first plate 782, 782G and second plate 783) and
When a second game ball launched by the launching means after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the occurrence of the second game state, the first game state is set. The first gaming state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786 or fourth plate 789G) to be generated, and
A game characterized by comprising a game ball guiding means (second plate 783) for guiding the second game ball to a region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Machine.

According to the feature K1 of the present invention group, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the gaming ball existing in the specific region in the gaming region can enter the first entering region, and the guiding means is the player. Since the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area is guided to the second ball entry area that gives the benefit to the player, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, since the game ball guiding means guides the game ball launched by the launching means to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state, the player can play the second game. You can enjoy the condition with confidence.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K1 of the present invention group,
The first game state generating means is based on the fact that the second game ball passes through another area different from a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state. A game machine characterized by generating a state.

According to the feature K2 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means passes through another region different from the predetermined region in the second gaming ball gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state. Since the first gaming state is generated, the first gaming state can be generated by using the second gaming ball.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature K1 or the feature K2 of the present invention group
The second game state generation means is executed based on the fact that the first game ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second gaming state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to the feature K3 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and when the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state is generated. Since the game state is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features K4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features K1 to K3 of the present invention group.
The game ball guiding means
A game ball guidance state in which the second game ball is guided to a region different from a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state.
It has a game ball non-guidance state in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state.
When the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the game ball guidance state is switched to, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by switching to the non-inducing state of the gaming ball.

According to the feature K4 of the present invention group, the gaming ball guiding means switches to the gaming ball guiding state when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, and the first gaming state generating means Since the game ball is switched to the non-guided state when the first game state is generated, it is restricted that the second game state generation means generates the second game state while the first game state is generated. Instead, it is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means during the generation of the second gaming state.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features K1 to K4 of the present invention group.
The first gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied based on only a part of the second gaming ball that satisfies a predetermined condition.

According to the feature K5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means satisfies a specific condition based only on a part of the second gaming balls satisfying a predetermined condition. The player pays attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features K1 to K5 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
A first probability state (high frequency disturbing mode) in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and
The second gaming state generating means has a second probability state (low frequency disturbing mode) for generating the second gaming state based on a second probability having a higher probability than the first probability. A featured game machine.

According to the feature K6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state is the first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability, and the first probability. Since the second gaming state generating means has a second probability state for generating the second gaming state based on the second probability having a higher probability than that of the player, the player has a probability state of the second gaming state generating means. Pay attention to, and play with the expectation that it will be in the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features K1 to K6 of the present invention group,
The second gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means is displaced by the first gaming ball to generate the second gaming state.

According to the feature K7 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the first gaming ball to generate the second gaming state, so that the second gaming state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features K1 to K7 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means is displaced by the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state.

According to the feature K8 of the present invention group, since the first gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state, the first gaming state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

According to such a feature K group of the present invention, the gaming machine can allow the player to play a game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which gives the player a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so that the player can play the game. The degree of attention to is increasing.

However, if the game is switched to the first game state without being given a profit during the occurrence of the second game state, the game machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game. ..

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1.
It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) provided with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board.
The first game state and
A second game state different from the first game state, in which only the game balls existing in the specific areas (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can be entered into the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction portion 751). Playing state and
A guide means (guide path 75) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area into the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that gives a profit to the player.
A second game that generates the second gaming state based on the fact that the first gaming ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the first gaming state. The state generating means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) and
When a second game ball launched by the launching means after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the occurrence of the second game state, the first game state is set. It is provided with a first gaming state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786) to generate the ball.
The first gaming state is
A first probability state (high frequency disturbing mode) in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and
The second gaming state generating means has a second probability state (low frequency disturbing mode) for generating the second gaming state based on a second probability having a higher probability than the first probability. A featured game machine.

According to the feature L1 of the present invention group, during the occurrence of the second gaming state, only the gaming ball existing in the specific region in the gaming region can enter the first entering region, and the guiding means is the player. Since the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area is guided to the second ball entry area that gives the benefit to the player, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second gaming state occurs. Further, the first gaming state is a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates a second gaming state based on the first probability, and a second probability state having a higher probability than the first probability. Since the second gaming state generating means has a second probability state for generating the second gaming state based on the probability, the player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and the second probability state. I will play with the expectation that it will be. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L1 of the present invention group
The second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state. A game machine characterized by being provided with a limiting means for limiting the number of players.

According to the feature L2 of the present invention group, the limiting means is the second gaming state generating means based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Since the generation of the second gaming state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L2 of the present invention group,
The limiting means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming ball is passed through a region different from a predetermined region in the gaming region during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

According to the feature L3 of the present invention group, since the limiting means passes the second game ball through another region different from the predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state, the second gaming state generating means It is possible to surely limit the generation of the second gaming state.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature L2 or the feature L3 of the present invention group
The limiting means
A restricted state that restricts the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means, and a restricted state.
It has an unrestricted state that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means.
When the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state, the non-game state is not generated. A game machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to the feature L4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, and the first gaming is performed by the first gaming state generating means. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game without limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means during the generation of the state.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L1 to L4 of the present invention group,
The second game state generation means is executed based on the fact that the first game ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second gaming state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to the feature L5 of the present invention group, the second game state generating means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and when the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state is generated. Since the game state is not generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L1 to L5 of the present invention group.
The first gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied based on only a part of the second gaming ball that satisfies a predetermined condition.

According to the feature L6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means satisfies a specific condition based on only a part of the second gaming balls satisfying a predetermined condition. The player pays attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L1 to L6 of the present invention group,
The second gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means is displaced by the first gaming ball to generate the second gaming state.

According to the feature L7 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the first gaming ball to generate the second gaming state, so that the second gaming state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features L1 to L7 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means is displaced by the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state.

According to the feature L8 of the present invention group, since the first gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state, the first gaming state is generated. The configuration of the means can be simplified.

According to the feature L group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which gives the player a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so that the player can play the game. The degree of attention to is increasing.

However, if the game is switched to the first game state without being given a profit during the occurrence of the second game state, the game machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game. ..

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1.
It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) provided with a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed in front of the gaming board.
The first game state and
A second gaming state different from the first gaming state,
Based on the fact that the first game ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined region in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state and is displaced in contact with the first game ball. , The second gaming state generating means (first plate 782, 782G and second plate 783) for generating the second gaming state, and
During the generation of the second gaming state, the second gaming ball launched by the launching means after the first gaming ball passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region and becomes the second gaming ball. The first gaming state generating means (stage distribution mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) that generates the first gaming state based on the contact and displacement.
The second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined region in the gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state. With a limiting means (second plate 783) to limit
The second game state generating means is a first profit-giving area (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F) that gives a player a first profit from the first game ball that generated the second game state. ), The first gaming state generating means gives the player a second benefit different from the first benefit by using the second gaming ball that generated the first gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is guided to a profit-giving area (lower stage 72).

According to the feature M1 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means puts the first gaming ball that generated the second gaming state into the first profit-giving area that gives the player the first profit. The first game state generating means guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to the second profit-giving area that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the guidance destination of the game ball. Further, the limiting means causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined area in the gaming area during the generation of the second gaming state. Since this is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Feature M2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature M1 of the present invention group,
The first game ball guided to the first profit-giving area by the second game state generating means receives the first profit that grants the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball, which has entered the ball region (upper stage introduction portion 751) and is guided to the second profit-giving region by the first game state generating means, is different from the first condition. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the condition 2 is satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower stage introduction unit 771) that gives the second profit.

According to the feature M2 of the present invention group, the first game ball guided to the first profit-giving region by the second game state generating means receives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that has entered the first profit-giving area to be granted and is guided to the second profit-giving area by the first game state generating means has a second condition different from the first condition. When the ball is satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area that gives the second profit, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

Feature M3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature M2 of the present invention group,
The first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are the first profit entry area and the second profit entry area. A gaming machine characterized in that it is discharged to another area different from both areas.

According to the feature M3 of the present invention group, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are the first profit entry area and the second profit. Since the ball is discharged to another area different from both areas of the ball entry area, the player will pay attention to whether or not the first game ball and the second game ball are discharged to the other area. ..

Features M4.
In the gaming machines described in the features M1 to M3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means
A restricted state that restricts the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means, and a restricted state.
It has an unrestricted state that does not limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means.
When the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the restricted state is switched to, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state, the non-game state is not generated. A game machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to the feature M4 of the present invention group, the limiting means switches to the restricted state when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, and the first gaming is performed by the first gaming state generating means. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game without limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the generation of the first game state. It is possible to reliably limit the generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means during the generation of the state.

Feature M5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features M1 to M4 of the present invention group.
The first gaming state is
A first probability state (high frequency disturbing mode) in which the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the first probability, and
The second gaming state generating means has a second probability state (low frequency disturbing mode) for generating the second gaming state based on a second probability having a higher probability than the first probability. A featured game machine.

According to the feature M5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state is the first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on the first probability, and the first probability. Since the second gaming state generating means has the second probability state of generating the second gaming state based on the second probability having a higher probability than that of the player, the player has the probability state of the second gaming state generating means. Pay attention to, and play with the expectation that it will be in the second probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature M group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which gives the player a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so that the player can play the game. The degree of attention to is increasing.

However, if the game is switched to the first game state without being given a profit during the occurrence of the second game state, the game machine has a problem that the player cannot comfortably play the game. ..

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25 and the operating port 261L) and the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with (main control device 4).
The game board
A primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives the player a primary benefit,
A secondary ball that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that gives a player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit. Flow path and
A third flow path that enables the game ball to enter the third entry area (equivalent winning opening 88L) that gives the player a third benefit smaller than the second benefit.
An operating state in which the game ball can flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the third flow path. It is provided with an operating member (rotational distribution means 82) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition.
The third-order flow path is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state, a game ball can enter only in the third-order entry region.

According to the feature N1 of the present invention group, the game machine is in an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and is in the third flow path. Since it has a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down and has an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition, the player can satisfy the predetermined operating condition. Based on the above, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the third flow path allows the game ball to enter only the third entry area in the predetermined gaming state, the player does not operate the operating member in the predetermined gaming state. In the state, the game ball will not be fired aiming at the third flow path. Therefore, in a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally gaining profit even when the gaming ball is launched toward the third flow path.

Feature N2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature N1 of the present invention group
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Machine.

According to the feature N2 of the present invention group, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path are different from each other in the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Therefore, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. In addition, the game machine has three flow paths, a first flow path, a second flow path, and a third flow path, in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route. Even if it has to be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature N3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature N1 or the feature N2 of the present invention group
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the primary ball entry area and delays the time until the game ball enters the primary ball entry area. )
The game machine
In addition to flowing down the secondary flow path until the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry region. The game machine, characterized in that, when the game ball of No. 1 enters the second ball entry area, a granting process for immediately granting the second benefit is performed.

According to the feature N3 of the present invention group, in the game machine, before the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area, the granting process for immediately giving the secondary benefit is performed, so that the player enters. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first entry area, the second benefit is immediately enjoyed. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature N4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature N3 of the present invention group
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The second ball entry area as a specific profit-giving means for giving profit to the player, and
It is provided with the operating member as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means.
The specific profit-giving means distributes a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then before the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on a game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the distribution means.

According to the feature N4 of the present invention group, the specific profit-giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Previously, the profit is given to the player based on the game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player enjoys the profit given by the specific profit giving means. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature N5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features N1 to N4 of the present invention group.
The third-order ball entry area is a gaming machine characterized in that one or less game balls can be imparted when one game ball is entered.

According to the feature N5 of the present invention group, in the third ball entry region, one or less game balls can be given when one game ball enters, so that the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is launched aiming at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not launched aiming at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature N6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features N1 to N5 of the present invention group.
In the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and causes the game ball to flow down into the secondary flow path. Is a game machine characterized in that the ratio is larger than the ratio of flowing the game ball down the primary flow path.

According to the feature N6 of the present invention group, in the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game is played in the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the ball flows down is larger than the rate at which the game ball flows down into the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down into the primary flow path. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature N group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

<Characteristic O group>
Features O1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
The game board
A primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives the player a primary benefit,
It is possible to enter the game ball into the third entry area (lower operating port 26, out opening 28, and equivalent winning opening 88L) that gives the player a third benefit smaller than the first benefit. The third flow path and
It has an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down the primary flow path and a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down the third flow path, based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions. , A working member (rotary sorting means 82 or moving sorting means 86J) that changes from the non-working state to the working state is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first-order flow path and the third-order flow path have different surfaces that form a flow path in the front-back direction of the game board.

According to the feature O1 of the present invention group, the game machine has an operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the primary flow path and a non-operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the third flow path. Since the player is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition, the player changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. You will play the game in the hope that it will become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board are different between the first flow path and the third flow path, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. it can. Further, in the case where the game machine must form two flow paths, a first flow path and a third flow path, in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route. Even if there is, it is possible to efficiently form a flow path by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature O2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature O1 of the present invention group
The game board
A game ball in a secondary entry region (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that gives the player a secondary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit and greater than the tertiary benefit. Equipped with a secondary flow path that allows the ball to enter
The operating member is in an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and allows the game ball to flow down into the third flow path. It has a non-operating state, and based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, the non-operating state is changed to the operating state.
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Machine.

According to the feature O2 of the present invention group, the game machine is in an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and is in the third flow path. Since it has a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down and has an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition, the player can satisfy the predetermined operating condition. Based on the above, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the surfaces forming the flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board are different between the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path, the game machine can be used as a game ball. The flow of can be diversified. Further, in the case where the game machine has to form three flow paths, a first flow path and a third flow path, in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route. Even if there is, it is possible to efficiently form a flow path by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature O3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature O2 of the present invention group
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the primary ball entry area and delays the time until the game ball enters the primary ball entry area. )
The game machine
In addition to flowing down the secondary flow path until the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry region. The game machine, characterized in that, when the game ball of No. 1 enters the second ball entry area, a granting process for immediately granting the second benefit is performed.

According to the feature O3 of the present invention group, in the game machine, before the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area, the granting process for immediately giving the secondary benefit is performed, so that the player enters. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball delay means to enter the primary ball entry area, the second benefit is immediately enjoyed. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature O4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature O2 of the present invention group
In the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and causes the game ball to flow down into the secondary flow path. Is a game machine characterized in that the ratio is larger than the ratio of flowing the game ball down the primary flow path.

According to the feature O4 of the present invention group, in the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game is played in the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the ball flows down is larger than the rate at which the game ball flows down into the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down into the primary flow path. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature O5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature O2 of the present invention group
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The second ball entry area as a specific profit-giving means for giving profit to the player, and
It is provided with the operating member as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means.
The specific profit-giving means distributes a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then before the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on a game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the distribution means.

According to the feature O5 of the present invention group, the specific profit-giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Previously, the profit is given to the player based on the game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player enjoys the profit given by the specific profit giving means. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature O6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features O1 to O5 of the present invention group,
The third-order flow path is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state, a game ball can enter only in the third-order entry region.

According to the feature O6 of the present invention group, in the predetermined gaming state, the third-order flow path allows the game ball to enter only in the third-order entry region, so that the player can enter the predetermined game. In the state, when the operating member is inactive, the game ball is not launched aiming at the third flow path. Therefore, in a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining a profit even when the gaming ball is launched toward the third flow path.

Feature O7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features O1 to O6 of the present invention group,
The third-order ball entry area is a gaming machine characterized in that one or less game balls can be imparted when one game ball is entered.

According to the feature O7 of the present invention group, since it is possible to give one or less game balls to the third ball entry region when one game ball enters, the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is launched aiming at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not launched aiming at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature O group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

<Characteristic P group>
Features P1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
The game board
A primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives the player a primary benefit,
A secondary ball that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that gives a player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit. Flow path and
It is possible to enter the game ball into the third entry area (lower operating port 26, out opening 28, and equivalent winning opening 88L) that gives the player a third benefit smaller than the second benefit. The third flow path and
An operating state in which the game ball can flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the third flow path. It is provided with an operating member (rotary distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition.
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the primary ball entry area and delays the time until the game ball enters the primary ball entry area. )
The game machine
In addition to flowing down the secondary flow path until the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry region. The game machine, characterized in that, when the game ball of No. 1 enters the second ball entry area, a granting process for immediately granting the second benefit is performed.

According to the feature P1 of the present invention group, the game machine is in an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and is in the third flow path. Since it has a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down and has an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition, the player can satisfy the predetermined operating condition. Based on the above, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the game machine flows down the secondary flow path until the game ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means enters the primary entry area. When another game ball is entered into the secondary entry area, the granting process for immediately giving the secondary benefit is performed, so that the player uses the primary entry delay means to perform the primary benefit. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the entry area of No. 1 to enter the first entry area, the second benefit can be immediately enjoyed. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature P2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature P1 of the present invention group,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The second ball entry area as a specific profit-giving means for giving profit to the player, and
It is provided with the operating member as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means.
The specific profit-giving means distributes a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then before the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on a game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the distribution means.

According to the feature P2 of the present invention group, the specific profit-giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Previously, the profit is given to the player based on the game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player enjoys the profit given by the specific profit giving means. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature P3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature P1 or the feature P2 of the present invention group
The third-order flow path is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state, a game ball can enter only in the third-order entry region.

According to the feature P3 of the present invention group, in the predetermined gaming state, the third-order flow path allows the game ball to enter only in the third-order entry region, so that the player can enter the predetermined game. In the state, when the operating member is inactive, the game ball is not launched aiming at the third flow path. Therefore, in a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining a profit even when the gaming ball is launched toward the third flow path.

Feature P4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features P1 to P3 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Machine.

According to the feature P4 of the present invention group, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path are different from each other in the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Therefore, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. In addition, the game machine has three flow paths, a first flow path, a second flow path, and a third flow path, in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route. Even if it has to be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature P5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features P1 to P4 of the present invention group,
The third-order ball entry area is a gaming machine characterized in that one or less game balls can be imparted when one game ball is entered.

According to the feature P5 of the present invention group, since it is possible to give one or less game balls to the third ball entry region when one game ball enters, the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is launched aiming at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not launched aiming at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature P6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features P1 to P5 of the present invention group,
In the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and causes the game ball to flow down into the secondary flow path. Is a game machine characterized in that the ratio is larger than the ratio of flowing the game ball down the primary flow path.

According to the feature P6 of the present invention group, in the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game is played in the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the ball flows down is larger than the rate at which the game ball flows down into the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down into the primary flow path. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature P group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

<Characteristic Q group>
Features Q1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25 and the operating port 261L) and the gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with (main control device 4).
The game board
A primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives the player a primary benefit,
A secondary ball that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that gives a player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit. Flow path and
A third flow path that enables the game ball to enter the third entry area (equivalent winning opening 88L) that gives the player a third benefit smaller than the second benefit.
An operating state in which the game ball can flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the third flow path. It is provided with an operating member (rotational distribution means 82) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition.
The third-order ball entry area is a gaming machine characterized in that one or less game balls can be imparted when one game ball is entered.

According to the feature Q1 of the present invention group, the game machine is in an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and is in the third flow path. Since it has a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down and has an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition, the player can satisfy the predetermined operating condition. Based on the above, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, in the third entry area, one or less game balls can be given when one game ball enters, so that the player aims at the operating member in the operating state of the operating member. When the operating member is inactive, the game ball is not launched aiming at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features Q2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature Q1 of the present invention group,
The third-order flow path is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state, a game ball can enter only in the third-order entry region.

According to the feature Q2 of the present invention group, in the predetermined gaming state, the third-order flow path allows the game ball to enter only in the third-order entry region, so that the player can enter the predetermined game. In the state, when the operating member is inactive, the game ball is not launched aiming at the third flow path. Therefore, in a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining a profit even when the gaming ball is launched toward the third flow path.

Features Q3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature Q1 or the feature Q2 of the present invention group
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Machine.

According to the feature Q3 of the present invention group, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path are different from each other in the surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Therefore, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. In addition, the game machine has three flow paths, a first flow path, a second flow path, and a third flow path, in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route. Even if it has to be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Features Q4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features Q1 to Q3 of the present invention group,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the primary ball entry area and delays the time until the game ball enters the primary ball entry area. )
The game machine
In addition to flowing down the secondary flow path until the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry region. The game machine, characterized in that, when the game ball of No. 1 enters the second ball entry area, a granting process for immediately granting the second benefit is performed.

According to the feature Q4 of the present invention group, in the game machine, before the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area, the granting process for immediately giving the secondary benefit is performed, so that the player enters. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first entry area, the second benefit is immediately enjoyed. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Features Q5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature Q4 of the present invention group,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The second ball entry area as a specific profit-giving means for giving profit to the player, and
It is provided with the operating member as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means.
The specific profit-giving means distributes a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then before the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on a game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the distribution means.

According to the feature Q5 of the present invention group, the specific profit-giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Previously, the profit is given to the player based on the game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player enjoys the profit given by the specific profit giving means. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features Q6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features Q1 to Q5 of the present invention group,
In the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and causes the game ball to flow down into the secondary flow path. Is a game machine characterized in that the ratio is larger than the ratio of flowing the game ball down the primary flow path.

According to the feature Q6 of the present invention group, in the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the game is played in the secondary flow path. Since the rate at which the ball flows down is larger than the rate at which the game ball flows down into the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down into the primary flow path. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature Q group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

<Characteristic R group>
Feature R1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
The game board
A primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that gives the player a primary benefit,
A secondary ball that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that gives a player a secondary benefit smaller than the primary benefit. Flow path and
It is possible to enter the game ball into the third entry area (lower operating port 26, out opening 28, and equivalent winning opening 88L) that gives the player a third benefit smaller than the second benefit. The third flow path and
An operating state in which the game ball can flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the third flow path. It is provided with an operating member (rotary distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition.
In the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and causes the game ball to flow down into the secondary flow path. Is a game machine characterized in that the ratio is larger than the ratio of flowing the game ball down the primary flow path.

According to the feature R1 of the present invention group, the game machine is in an operating state that allows the game ball to flow down to either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and is in the third flow path. Since it has a non-operating state that allows the game ball to flow down and has an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition, the player can satisfy the predetermined operating condition. Based on the above, the game is played with the expectation that the non-operating state will be changed to the operating state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, in the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the secondary flow path is the first. Since it is larger than the rate at which the game ball flows down into the primary flow path, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball flows down into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature R2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature R1 of the present invention group
The third-order flow path is a gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined gaming state, a game ball can enter only in the third-order entry region.

According to the feature R2 of the present invention group, in the predetermined gaming state, the third-order flow path allows the game ball to enter only in the third-order entry region, so that the player can enter the predetermined game. In the state, when the operating member is inactive, the game ball is not launched aiming at the third flow path. Therefore, in a predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from illegally obtaining a profit even when the gaming ball is launched toward the third flow path.

Feature R3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature R1 or the feature R2 of the present invention group
A game characterized in that the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Machine.

According to the feature R3 of the present invention group, the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path have different surfaces forming the flow path in the front and back directions of the game board. Therefore, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball. In addition, the game machine has three flow paths, a first flow path, a second flow path, and a third flow path, in the flow path when the game ball is launched toward one route. Even if it has to be formed, the flow path can be efficiently formed by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board.

Feature R4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features R1 to R3 of the present invention group,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the primary ball entry area and delays the time until the game ball enters the primary ball entry area. )
The game machine
In addition to flowing down the secondary flow path until the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry region. The game machine, characterized in that, when the game ball of No. 1 enters the second ball entry area, a granting process for immediately granting the second benefit is performed.

According to the feature R4 of the present invention group, in the game machine, before the game ball guided to the primary ball entry area by the ball entry delay means enters the primary ball entry area, When another game ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the secondary entry area, the granting process for immediately giving the secondary benefit is performed, so that the player enters. Even while waiting for the game ball guided to the first entry area by the ball delay means to enter the first entry area, the second benefit is immediately enjoyed. be able to. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature R5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature R4 of the present invention group,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
The second ball entry area as a specific profit-giving means for giving profit to the player, and
It is provided with the operating member as a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means.
The specific profit-giving means distributes a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then before the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on a game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the distribution means.

According to the feature R5 of the present invention group, the specific profit-giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Previously, the profit is given to the player based on the game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player enjoys the profit given by the specific profit giving means. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature R6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features R1 to R5 of the present invention group,
The third-order ball entry area is a gaming machine characterized in that one or less game balls can be imparted when one game ball is entered.

According to the feature R6 of the present invention group, since it is possible to give one or less game balls to the third ball entry region when one game ball enters, the player can use the operating member. In the operating state, the game ball is launched aiming at the operating member, and in the non-operating state of the operating member, the game ball is not launched aiming at the operating member. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature R group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

<Feature S group>
Features S1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
With the specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. ,
A special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. A game machine characterized by comprising a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing the above.

According to the feature S1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is specified after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game of the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. Since the player is provided with the special game execution means for executing the special game different from the game in the controlled state, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature S2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S1 of the present invention group,
The special game execution means is
A special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that pays out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
It is provided with a ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means.
The game machine is characterized by comprising a special game route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to the feature S2 of the present invention group, since the special game executing means includes the special game paying out means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, the player executes the special game. At that time, the number of game balls can be increased.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific entry means and delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature S3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S2 of the present invention group,
The special game payout means
A special game entry means (open start port 83) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
The game ball payout means is set so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.

According to the feature S3 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features S4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S3 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
An unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
It has a regulated state that regulates setting the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and puts the game ball payout means into the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning).

According to the feature S4 of the present invention group, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. Since it is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching to a regulated state, when the player is executing a special game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the special game entering means and does not execute the special game. In addition, the game ball will not be launched aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature S5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S3 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
A first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period after the game ball enters the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter.
A second ball entry in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is a period longer than the predetermined period. Has a waiting period and
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. A gaming machine including a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball entry waiting period.

According to the feature S5 of the present invention group, when the game machine is executing the special game, the game ball payout means is switched to the first entry waiting period, and when the special game is not executed, the game is played. Since the ball payout means is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period, the player can aim at the special game entry means when the player is performing the special game. When it is fired and the special game is not executed, the game ball will not be fired aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature S6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features S2 to S5 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means
The Kroon (Kroon 81) having a turning surface (Kroon surface 812) for turning the game ball is provided.
The Kroon
A guideable hole (hole 814) that enables the game ball that swivels on the swivel surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-guideable hole (holes 815, 816) that makes it impossible to guide the game ball that swivels on the turning surface to the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature S6 of the present invention group, the Kroon cannot guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means and the guideable hole that can guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means. Since it is provided with a non-guidance hole, the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature S7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features S2 to S6 of the present invention group,
Special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82, mobile distribution means 86J, or rotary distribution means 87K) that distributes a game ball flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature S7 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. , The game will be played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means by the special distribution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature S8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S7 of the present invention group,
The special sorting means
A distribution-capable state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
It has a non-sortable state (normally guided state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the special distribution means to the distribution possible state, and when the special game is not being executed, the special distribution means is used for the distribution. A game machine characterized by being provided with a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) for switching to an impossible state.

According to the feature S8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special sorting means to the sortable state when the special game is being executed, and is the special sorting means when the special game is not being executed. Since it is equipped with a distribution state switching means for switching to a non-distribution state, the player should play the game with the expectation that the special distribution means can be switched to the distribution possible state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature S9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S8 of the present invention group,
In the distribution capable state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board, and in the distribution impossible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball. A game machine characterized by distributing a game ball flowing down the special game path so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. ..

According to the feature S9 of the present invention group, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board and distributes the game ball. In the impossible state, the game machine is configured so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board, so that the game machine diversifies the flow of the game ball. be able to.

According to the feature S group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, so that the flow becomes monotonous and the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Characteristic T group>
Features T1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
A special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that pays out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
The first route (left-handed route) leading to the starting ball entry means and
The special game payout means is provided, and a second route (right-handed route) different from the first route is provided.
The special game payout means
A special game entry means (open start port 83) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) that pays out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
A firing suppressing means for suppressing firing of a game ball toward the second path by switching the state of the special game payout means is provided.
The game ball payout means is set so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.

According to the feature T1 of the present invention group, the launch suppressing means suppresses the firing of the game ball toward the second path by switching the state of the special game payout means, so that the player can perform the special game. The game ball will not be fired toward the second path aiming at the ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably.

Feature T2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T1 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
An unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
It has a regulated state that regulates setting the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
The launch suppressing means is a gaming machine including a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) for switching the game ball payout means to either the non-regulated state or the regulated state.

According to the feature T2 of the present invention group, since the launch suppressing means includes the regulated state switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the unregulated state or the regulated state, the player can use the regulated state switching means. When the game ball payout means is switched to the regulated state, the game ball is not fired toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature T3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T1 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
A first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period after the game ball enters the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter.
A second ball entry in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is a period longer than the predetermined period. Has a waiting period and
The launch suppressing means is provided with a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entry waiting period.

According to the feature T3 of the present invention group, the launch suppressing means includes the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entering waiting period. Therefore, when the player switches to the second ball entry waiting period by the ball entry waiting period switching means, the player does not shoot the game ball toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature T4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features T1 to T3 of the present invention group.
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
With the specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. ,
A special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. With a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) to execute
The special game execution means is a game machine including the special game payout means.

According to the feature T4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is specified after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game of the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. Since the player is provided with the special game execution means for executing the special game different from the game in the controlled state, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature T5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T4 of the present invention group,
The special game execution means is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific entry means and delaying the time until the game ball enters the specific entry means is provided.
The game machine is characterized by comprising the second route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to the feature T5 of the present invention group, since the special game executing means includes the special game paying out means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, the player executes the special game. At that time, the number of game balls can be increased.
Further, the special game execution means is provided with a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific entry means and delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the time before the start of the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means can be delayed, and the player can specify. You can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the controlled state.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the second path.

Feature T6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T5 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means
The Kroon (Kroon 81) having a turning surface (Kroon surface 812) for turning the game ball is provided.
The Kroon
A guideable hole (hole 814) that enables the game ball that swivels on the swivel surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-guideable hole (holes 815, 816) that makes it impossible to guide the game ball that swivels on the turning surface to the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature T6 of the present invention group, the Kroon cannot guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means and the guideable hole that can guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means. Since it is provided with a non-guidance hole, the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature T7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T5 or the feature T6 of the present invention group
Special distribution means (rotational distribution means 82, mobile distribution means 86J, or rotary distribution means 87K) that distributes the game ball flowing down the second path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. ) Is provided.

According to the feature T7 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the second path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. Will play the game with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means by the special distribution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature T8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T7 of the present invention group,
The special sorting means
A distribution-capable state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the second path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
It has a non-sortable state (normally guided state) in which the game ball flowing down the second path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the special distribution means to the distribution possible state, and when the special game is not being executed, the special distribution means is used for the distribution. A game machine characterized by being provided with a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) for switching to an impossible state.

According to the feature T8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special sorting means to the sortable state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the special sorting means. Since it is equipped with a distribution state switching means for switching to a non-distribution state, the player should play the game with the expectation that the special distribution means can be switched to the distribution possible state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature T9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature T8 of the present invention group,
In the distribution capable state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board, and in the distribution impossible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball. A game characterized in that the game balls flowing down the second path are distributed so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. Machine.

According to the feature T9 of the present invention group, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board and distributes the game ball. In the impossible state, the game machine is configured so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board, so that the game machine diversifies the flow of the game ball. be able to.

According to the feature T group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can allow the player to play the game comfortably, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
Such a game machine includes a first route (left-handed route) and a second route (right-handed route) different from the first route, and the player can use the first route and the second route. A game ball is being fired toward one of the paths.

However, when either the first route or the second route is regarded as a route advantageous to the player, the player heads toward a route advantageous to the player regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine. There is a problem that the game ball is fired and the player cannot comfortably play the game.

<Characteristic U group>
Features U1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
With the specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. ,
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means.
After the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means, the player is benefited according to the length of the period before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state. It is equipped with a period profit giving means (open starting port 83 and open winning device 84).
The game machine is characterized by comprising a special game route (right-handed route) leading to both the period profit giving means and the ball entry delay means.

According to the feature U1 of the present invention group, the game machine guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means, and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Since the delay means is provided, it is possible to delay the time after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. ..
Then, the period profit granting means depends on the length of the period from the transition of the gaming state to the specific control state by the gaming state transition means to the start of the game of the specific control state by the specific control start means. Profit can be given to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features U2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U1 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means
The Kroon (Kroon 81) having a turning surface (Kroon surface 812) for turning the game ball is provided.
The Kroon
A guideable hole (hole 814) that enables the game ball that swivels on the swivel surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-guideable hole (holes 815, 816) that makes it impossible to guide the game ball that swivels on the turning surface to the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature U2 of the present invention group, the Kroon cannot guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means and the guideable hole that can guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means. Since it is provided with a non-guidance hole, the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Features U3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U1 or the feature U2 of the present invention group
A special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. Equipped with a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) to execute
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) as the period profit giving means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
A gaming machine including the ball entry delay means.

According to the feature U3 of the present invention group, since the special game executing means includes the special game paying out means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, the player executes the special game. At that time, the number of game balls can be increased.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific entry means and delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the special game path.

Features U4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U3 of the present invention group,
The special game payout means
A special game entry means (open start port 83) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
The game ball payout means is set so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.

According to the feature U4 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features U5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U4 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
An unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
It has a regulated state that regulates setting the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and puts the game ball payout means into the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning).

According to the feature U5 of the present invention group, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. Since it is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching to a regulated state, when the player is executing a special game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the special game entering means and does not execute the special game. In addition, the game ball will not be launched aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features U6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U4 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
A first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period after the game ball enters the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter.
A second ball entry in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is a period longer than the predetermined period. Has a waiting period and
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. A gaming machine including a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball entry waiting period.

According to the feature U6 of the present invention group, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the first entry waiting period when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game is played. Since the ball payout means is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period, the player can aim at the special game entry means when the player is performing the special game. When it is fired and the special game is not executed, the game ball will not be fired aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features U7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features U3 to U6 of the present invention group.
Special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82, mobile distribution means 86J, or rotary distribution means 87K) that distributes a game ball flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature U7 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with a special distribution means for distributing the game ball flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. , The game is played with the expectation that the game ball will be distributed to the special game payout means by the special distribution means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features U8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U7 of the present invention group,
The special sorting means
A distribution-capable state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
It has a non-sortable state (normally guided state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the special distribution means to the distribution possible state, and when the special game is not being executed, the special distribution means is used for the distribution. A game machine characterized by being provided with a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) for switching to an impossible state.

According to the feature U8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special sorting means to the sortable state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the special sorting means. Since it is equipped with a distribution state switching means for switching to a non-distribution state, the player should play the game with the expectation that the special distribution means can be switched to the distribution possible state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features U9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature U8 of the present invention group,
In the distribution capable state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board, and in the distribution impossible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball. A game machine characterized by distributing a game ball flowing down the special game path so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. ..

According to the feature U9 of the present invention group, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board and distributes the game ball. In the impossible state, the game machine is configured so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board, so that the game machine diversifies the flow of the game ball. be able to.

According to the feature U group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, so that the flow becomes monotonous and the player's attention to the game decreases. There is a problem of doing it.

<Feature V group>
Features V1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
Specific profit-giving means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that give profit to the player, and
A special distribution means (rotational distribution means 82, mobile distribution means 86J, or rotary distribution means 87K) for distributing a game ball flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific profit giving means. Prepare,
The specific profit-giving means distributes a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then before the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the special A gaming machine characterized in that a profit is given to a player based on a game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the distribution means.

According to the feature V1 of the present invention group, the specific profit-giving means distributes the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means by the special distribution means, and then the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Previously, the profit is given to the player based on the game ball distributed to the specific profit giving means by the special distribution means, so that the player enjoys the profit given by the specific profit giving means. Can be done. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature V2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature V1 of the present invention group,
The specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts the game in the specific control state when the game ball that flows down the game area is entered.
With the specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. ,
A special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. With a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) to execute
The special game execution means is
Special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) as the specific profit giving means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
It is provided with a ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means.
The game machine is characterized by comprising a special game route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to the feature V2 of the present invention group, since the special game executing means includes a special game paying out means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, the player executes the special game. At that time, the number of game balls can be increased.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific entry means and delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the specific entry means. Therefore, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature V3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature V2 of the present invention group,
The special game payout means
A special game entry means (open start port 83) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
The game ball payout means is set so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.

According to the feature V3 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features V4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature V3 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
An unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
It has a regulated state that regulates setting the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and puts the game ball payout means into the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning).

According to the feature V4 of the present invention group, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. Since it is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching to a regulated state, when the player is executing a special game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the special game entering means and does not execute the special game. In addition, the game ball will not be launched aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature V5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature V3 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
A first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period after the game ball enters the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter.
A second ball entry in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is a period longer than the predetermined period. Has a waiting period and
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. A gaming machine including a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball entry waiting period.

According to the feature V5 of the present invention group, when the game machine is executing the special game, the game ball payout means is switched to the first entry waiting period, and when the special game is not executed, the game is played. Since the ball payout means is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period, the player can aim at the special game entry means when the player is performing the special game. When it is fired and the special game is not executed, the game ball will not be fired aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature V6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features V2 to V5 of the present invention group.
The ball entry delay means
The Kroon (Kroon 81) having a turning surface (Kroon surface 812) for turning the game ball is provided.
The Kroon
A guideable hole (hole 814) that enables the game ball that swivels on the swivel surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-guideable hole (holes 815, 816) that makes it impossible to guide the game ball that swivels on the turning surface to the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature V6 of the present invention group, the Kroon cannot guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means and the guideable hole that allows the game ball that turns on the turning surface to be guided to the specific entry means. Since it is equipped with a non-guidance hole, the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature V7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features V2 to V6 of the present invention group,
The special sorting means
A distribution-capable state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
It has a non-sortable state (normally guided state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the special distribution means to the distribution possible state, and when the special game is not being executed, the special distribution means is used for the distribution. A game machine characterized by being provided with a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) for switching to an impossible state.

According to the feature V7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special sorting means to the sortable state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the special sorting means. Since it is equipped with a distribution state switching means for switching to a non-distribution state, the player should play the game with the expectation that the special distribution means can be switched to the distribution possible state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature V8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature V7 of the present invention group,
In the distribution capable state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the surface of the game board, and in the distribution impossible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball. A game machine characterized by distributing a game ball flowing down the special game path so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board. ..

According to the feature V8 of the present invention group, in the distribution possible state, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing it through the surface of the game board and distributes the game ball. In the impossible state, the game machine is configured so that the game ball is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board, so that the game machine diversifies the flow of the game ball. be able to.

According to the feature V group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.

However, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the game state shifts to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, and in this specific control state, the game machine is variable to a state in which the game ball can enter. Since a large amount of game balls are paid out by shifting the winning device, the flow of giving profits to the player becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game decreases. ..

<Characteristic W group>
Features W1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
A special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82) for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path is provided.
The special distribution means distributes the game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing through the front surface of the game board, and distributes the game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing through the back surface of the game board. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the feature W1 of the present invention group, the special distribution means distributes the game ball to the first distribution flow path by passing it through the front surface of the game board, and passes the game ball through the back surface of the game board to pass the second distribution flow path. Since the game balls are distributed to the game machines, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game balls.

Feature W2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W1 of the present invention group,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
With the specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. ,
A special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. With a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) to execute
The special game execution means is
A special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that pays out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
It is provided with a ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means.
The game machine includes a special game route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.
The special distribution means is a gaming machine characterized in that a game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means via the first distribution flow path. ..

According to the feature W2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is specified after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game of the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. Since the player is provided with the special game execution means for executing the special game different from the game in the controlled state, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the special game execution means includes a special game payout means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, the player can increase the number of game balls when executing the special game. it can.
Then, the special game execution means is provided with a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature W3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W2 of the present invention group,
The special game payout means
A special game entry means (open start port 83) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
The game ball payout means is set so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.

According to the feature W3 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features W4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W3 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
An unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
It has a regulated state that regulates setting the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and puts the game ball payout means into the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning).

According to the feature W4 of the present invention group, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. Since it is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching to a regulated state, when the player is executing a special game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the special game entering means and does not execute the special game. In addition, the game ball will not be launched aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature W5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature W3 of the present invention group,
The game ball payout means
A first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period after the game ball enters the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter.
A second ball entry in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is a period longer than the predetermined period. Has a waiting period and
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. A gaming machine including a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball entry waiting period.

According to the feature W5 of the present invention group, when the game machine is executing the special game, the game ball payout means is switched to the first entry waiting period, and when the special game is not executed, the game is played. Since the ball payout means is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period, the player can aim at the special game entry means when the player is performing the special game. When it is fired and the special game is not executed, the game ball will not be fired aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature W6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features W2 to W5 of the present invention group.
The ball entry delay means
The Kroon (Kroon 81) having a turning surface (Kroon surface 812) for turning the game ball is provided.
The Kroon
A guideable hole (hole 814) that enables the game ball that swivels on the swivel surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-guideable hole (holes 815, 816) that makes it impossible to guide the game ball that swivels on the turning surface to the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature W6 of the present invention group, the Kroon cannot guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means and the guideable hole that can guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means. Since it is provided with a non-guidance hole, the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature W7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features W2 to W6 of the present invention group.
The special sorting means
A distribution-capable state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
It has a non-sortable state (normally guided state) in which a game ball flowing down the special game path is not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the special distribution means to the distribution possible state, and when the special game is not being executed, the special distribution means is used for the distribution. A game machine characterized by being provided with a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) for switching to an impossible state.

According to the feature W7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine switches the special sorting means to the sortable state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the special sorting means. Since it is equipped with a distribution state switching means for switching to a non-distribution state, the player should play the game with the expectation that the special distribution means can be switched to the distribution possible state by the distribution state switching means. become. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature W group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine has a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately disperse the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area.

However, since the game machine distributes the game balls by passing through the surface of the game board, the flow becomes monotonous, and there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature X group>
Feature X1.
A launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a game ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board, and a starting ball entering means (upper operating port) for executing an internal lottery when entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. 25, the lower actuating port 26, and the actuating port 261L), and based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entering means, the gaming state is set to a specific control state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) including a game state transition means (main control device 4) to be shifted.
A special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) for distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path is provided.
The special sorting means
A distribution-capable state (specific guidance state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path, and
It has a distribution impossible state (normal induction state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path.
The game machine is characterized by comprising a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) for switching the special distribution means to either the distribution enabled state or the distribution impossible state.

According to the feature X1 of the present invention group, since the game machine includes the distribution state switching means for switching the special distribution means to either the distribution possible state or the distribution impossible state, the player can distribute. The game is played with the expectation that the special sorting means will be switched to the sorting possible state by the state switching means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature X2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X1 of the present invention group
The special distribution means distributes a game ball to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path by passing through the front surface of the game board, and passes the game ball through the back surface of the game board. A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball is distributed to a first distribution flow path and another flow path different from the second distribution flow path.

According to the feature X2 of the present invention group, the game ball is distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path by passing through the front surface of the game board, and the first by passing through the back surface of the game board. Since the game ball is distributed to the distribution flow path of the above and another flow path different from the second distribution flow path, the game machine can diversify the flow of the game ball.

Feature X3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X1 or the feature X2 of the present invention group
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area is entered.
With the specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts the game in the specific control state when the ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means. ,
A special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. With a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) to execute
The special game execution means is
A special game payout means (open start port 83 and open winning device 84) that pays out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
It is provided with a ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means.
The game machine includes a special game route (right-handed route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.
The special distribution means distributes a game ball flowing down the special game path to the special game payout means via the first distribution flow path, and the ball entry delay means via the second distribution flow path. A game machine characterized by being distributed to.

According to the feature X3 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is specified after the gaming state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means and before the game of the specific control state is started by the specific control start means. Since the special game execution means for executing the special game different from the game in the controlled state is provided, the player can enjoy the special game different from the game in the specific controlled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, since the special game execution means includes a special game payout means for paying out the game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area enters, the player can increase the number of game balls when executing the special game. it can.
Then, the special game execution means is provided with a ball entry delay means for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delaying the time until the game ball is entered into the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after shifting the gaming state to the specific control state by the game state transition means, it is possible to delay the time before starting the game in the specific control state by the specific control start means.
Therefore, the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state by firing the game ball toward the special game path.

Feature X4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X3 of the present invention group
The special game payout means
A special game entry means (open start port 83) for entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with a game ball payout means (open winning device 84) for paying out the game ball when the game ball flows down the game area.
The game ball payout means is set so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.

According to the feature X4 of the present invention group, the game ball payout means is set so that the game ball flowing down the game area can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means. Attention will be paid to whether or not the game ball enters the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature X5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X4 of the present invention group
The game ball payout means
An unregulated state that does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area so that it can be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
It has a regulated state that regulates setting the game ball flowing down the game area so that it cannot be entered when the game ball enters the special game entry means.
The game machine switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being executed, and puts the game ball payout means into the regulated state when the special game is not being executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a regulation state switching means (winning process for open winning).

According to the feature X5 of the present invention group, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the unregulated state when the special game is being executed, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. Since it is equipped with a regulated state switching means for switching to a regulated state, when the player is executing a special game, the player shoots a game ball aiming at the special game entering means and does not execute the special game. In addition, the game ball will not be launched aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature X6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X4 of the present invention group
The game ball payout means
A first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period after the game ball enters the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter.
A second ball entry in which the period from the entry of the game ball into the special game entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter is a period longer than the predetermined period. Has a waiting period and
When the special game is being executed, the game machine switches the game ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period, and when the special game is not being executed, the game ball payout means is used. A gaming machine including a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching to the second ball entry waiting period.

According to the feature X6 of the present invention group, when the game machine is executing the special game, the game ball payout means is switched to the first entry waiting period, and when the special game is not executed, the game is played. Since the ball payout means is provided with the ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period, the player can aim at the special game entry means when the player is performing the special game. When it is fired and the special game is not executed, the game ball will not be fired aiming at the special game entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature X7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features X3 to X6 of the present invention group,
The ball entry delay means
The Kroon (Kroon 81) having a turning surface (Kroon surface 812) for turning the game ball is provided.
The Kroon
A guideable hole (hole 814) that enables the game ball that swivels on the swivel surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and
A game machine characterized in that it is provided with a non-guideable hole (holes 815, 816) that makes it impossible to guide the game ball that swivels on the turning surface to the specific ball entry means.

According to the feature X7 of the present invention group, the Kroon cannot guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means and the guideable hole that can guide the game ball that turns on the turning surface to the specific entry means. Since it is equipped with a non-guidance hole, the time from when the game state is shifted to the specific control state by the game state transition means until the game in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means is delayed. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

According to the feature X group of the present invention as described above, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, and thus can solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a variable display means for variablely displaying a plurality of patterns has been known. When the game ball enters the operating port (starting ball entry means), the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts a variable display of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the jackpot lottery, the variable display means finally stops and displays the combination of specific patterns and the like, and shifts the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of gaming balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which the gaming balls can enter.
By the way, such a game machine has a large number of nails planted in order to appropriately disperse the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill in the game area.

However, since the game machine always distributes the game balls by various members such as nails and windmills, the flow becomes monotonous and the player's attention to the game is lowered. is there.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

1 ... Pachinko machine, 24 ... General winning opening, 25 ... Upper operating port, 26 ... Lower operating port, 27 ... Variable winning device, 271 ... Large winning opening, 272 ... Opening and closing door, 273 ... Variable winning drive unit, 28 ... Out Mouth, 35 ... symbol display device, 4 ... main control device, 42 ... MPU, 5 ... voice emission control device, 52 ... MPU, 6 ... display control device, 62 ... MPU.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a starting ball entering means for executing an internal lottery when entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a starting ball entering means A game machine provided with a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters.
The game board
A primary flow path that allows a game ball to enter the primary ball entry area that gives the player a primary benefit, and a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter.
A secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter the secondary entry region that gives the player a secondary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit.
A third flow path that allows the game ball to enter the third entry area that gives the player a third benefit that is smaller than the second benefit.
An operating state in which the game ball can flow down into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and a non-operating state in which the game ball can flow down into the third flow path. It is provided with an operating member that changes from the non-operating state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition.
In the operating state, the operating member causes the game ball to flow down only in either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and causes the game ball to flow down into the secondary flow path. Is a game machine characterized in that the ratio is larger than the ratio of flowing the game ball down the primary flow path.

Images